SONY RDR-HXD770 - DVD Recorder

RDR-HXD770 - DVD Recorder SONY - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free RDR-HXD770 SONY in PDF.

📄 172 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice SONY RDR-HXD770 - page 1
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type DVD Recorder with Hard Disk Drive
Brand Sony
Model RDR-HXD770
Hard Disk Capacity 160 GB
Dimensions (Approx.) 430 x 70 x 300 mm (width x height x depth)
Weight (Approx.) 4.0 kg
Power Supply 220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption Approx. 28 W (in operation), 0.5 W (standby)
Recording Media HDD, DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD+R DL, DVD-R DL
Playback Media DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, CD, DATA DVD, DATA CD
Tuner Digital (Freeview) and Analogue terrestrial
HDMI Output Yes, with BRAVIA Theatre Sync support
DV Input Yes (i.LINK) for camcorder dubbing
USB Port Yes (front panel) for music and photo transfer
GUIDE Plus+ Electronic Programme Guide (analogue only)
Timer Recording Manual, EPG, and Series Recording support
Other Features Chase Play, Simultaneous Rec and Play, TV Pause
Safety Class 1 Laser product; refer servicing to qualified personnel only
Maintenance Clean with dry cloth; do not use liquid cleaners
Spare Parts / Repairability Contact Sony service centre; do not attempt self-repair

Frequently Asked Questions - RDR-HXD770 SONY

How do I finalize a recorded DVD so it can be played on other DVD players?
Insert the disc, press SYSTEM MENU, select Disc Setup > Finalise, then choose Finalise and follow the on-screen instructions. For DVD-RW (Video mode), finalisation is required; for DVD+RW it is usually automatic.
What types of discs can I record on?
You can record on HDD, DVD+RW, DVD-RW (VR or Video mode), DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD+R DL, and DVD-R DL. Unformatted discs are formatted automatically. Refer to the manual for compatibility details.
How do I connect the recorder to my TV?
Use a SCART cable, component video (Y Pb/Cb Pr/Cr), S-Video, or HDMI cable. For best quality, use HDMI. Connect the aerial to DIGITAL AERIAL IN for Freeview or ANALOG AERIAL IN for analogue.
Can I record from a camcorder?
Yes, connect your camcorder to the DV IN jack on the front panel using an i.LINK cable. Then use DV One Touch Dubbing or Manual Dubbing from the System Menu.
How do I set a timer recording?
Press TIMER, then select Standard for manual setting or use the EPG/GUIDE Plus+ to choose a programme. Set date, start/end times, channel, and recording mode. Confirm by pressing ENTER.
What should I do if the disc is not recognised?
Ensure the disc is compatible (see Recordable/Playable discs section). For unfinalised DVD-RW (Video mode) or discs from other recorders, finalise or reformat. Clean the disc and check for scratches.
How do I play back a recorded programme?
Press HDD or DVD, then press TITLE LIST. Use arrow keys to select a title and press ENTER to start playback. You can also sort by date, title, or genre.
What is the GUIDE Plus+ system and how do I set it up?
GUIDE Plus+ is an electronic programme guide for analogue broadcasts. Press GUIDE and follow the Basic Setup to enter your postal code and configure external receiver control using the supplied set top box controller.
How do I reset the recorder to factory settings?
Turn off the recorder, then press and hold the I/O button on the front panel for about 10 seconds until 'RESET' appears on the display. This will erase all settings and scheduled recordings.
How can I update the software?
Software updates are distributed via broadcast or USB. Press SYSTEM MENU, go to Initial Setup > Options, and select Software Update. Follow the on-screen instructions.

User questions about RDR-HXD770 SONY

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your DVD Recorder in PDF format for free! Find your manual RDR-HXD770 - SONY and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. RDR-HXD770 by SONY.

USER MANUAL RDR-HXD770 SONY

natural_image Abstract grayscale graphic with curved lines and a grid background, no text or symbols present.

DVD Recorder

Operating Instructions

SONY RDR-HXD770 - DVD Recorder - 1

To find out useful hints, tips and information about Sony products and services please visit: www.sony-europe.com/myproduct

RDR-HXD770/HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

RW DVD+ReWritable DVD VIDEO/R/RW COMPACT disc i™ DVB® Digital Video Broadcasting BRAVIA Theatre Sync GUIDEplus+ GEMSTAR HDMI

WARNING

To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

The mains lead must be changed only at a qualified service shop. Batteries or batteries installed apparatus shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT

This appliance is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER product. The CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT MARKING is located on the rear of the unit.

CAUTION

The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard. As the laser beam used in this DVD recorder is harmful to eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

CAUTION CLASS 38 VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID DIRECT EXPRESURE TO THE BEAM. VORSICHT KLASSE 38 SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLING WENN GEÖFFNET, DIREKTE NOKTAKT WT DEM STRAHL VERMEIDEN. ADWARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRAELING AF KLASSE 38 38 VED ÄRNING, UNOGA DIREKTE UDSGETTELSE FOR STRÄLING. ADWARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRAELING I KLASSE 38 NAR DEKSEL ÄRNE, UNOGA DIREKTE EKSPONERING FOR STRÄLEN. WARNING KLASSE 38 SYN LIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRAELNING NAR DENNA DEL AR ÖPPNAD, UNIVAK ATT DIREKT EXPONERA DIG FOR STRÄLENGEN. VAROI AWATTUKA LUKGAN 38 NÄKYVÄLA JA NÄKYVÄLA TONTA LASERSÄTELYÄ, VALTA SUORA ALISTANISTA SÄTEELLE.

This label is located on the laser protective housing inside the enclosure.

Notice for customers in the United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland

A molded plug complying with BS1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience. Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362, (i.e., marked with

or mark) must be used. If the plug supplied with this equipment has a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover. If you should lose the fuse cover, please contact your nearest Sony service station.

Precautions

  • This unit operates on 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Check that the unit's operating voltage is identical with your local power supply.
  • To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the apparatus.
    • Install this system so that the mains lead can be unplugged from the wall socket immediately in the event of trouble.

GUIDE Plus+ and G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/ OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR- TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND /OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Precautions - 1

Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)

This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local Civic Office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) - 1

Disposal of waste batteries (applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)

This symbol on the battery or on the packaging indicates that the battery provided with this product shall not be treated as household waste.

By ensuring these batteries are disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of the battery. The recycling of the materials will help to conserve natural resources.

In case of products that for safety, performance or data integrity reasons require a permanent connection with an incorporated battery, this battery should be replaced by qualified service staff only.

To ensure that the battery will be treated properly, hand over the product at end-of-life to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment.

For all other batteries, please view the section on how to remove the battery from the product safely. Hand the battery over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of waste batteries.

For more detailed information about recycling of this product or battery, please contact your local Civic Office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.

The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan Minato-ku Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan. The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents.

Precautions

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits set out in the EMC Directive using a connection cable shorter than 3 metres.

On safety

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, unplug the recorder and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

About the hard disk drive

The hard disk has a high storage density, which enables long recording durations and quick access to the written data. However, it can easily be damaged by shock, vibration or dust, and should be kept away from magnets. To avoid losing important data, observe the following precautions.

  • Do not apply a strong shock to the recorder.
  • Do not place the recorder in a location subject to mechanical vibrations or in an unstable location.
  • Do not place the recorder on top of a hot surface, such as a VCR or amplifier (receiver).
  • Do not use the recorder in a place subject to extreme changes in temperature (temperature gradient less than 10^ / hour ).
  • Do not move the recorder with its mains lead connected.
  • Do not disconnect the mains lead while the power is on.
  • When disconnecting the mains lead, turn off the power and make sure that the hard disk drive is not operating (the clock is displayed in the front panel display for at least 30 seconds and all recording or dubbing has stopped).
  • Do not move the recorder for one minute after you have unplugged the mains lead.

- Do not attempt to replace or upgrade the hard disk by yourself, as this may result in malfunction.

If the hard disk drive should malfunction, you cannot recover lost data. The hard disk drive is only a temporary storage space.

About repairing the hard disk drive

  • The contents of the hard disk drive may be checked in case of repair or inspection during a malfunction or modification. However, the contents will not be backed up or saved by Sony.
  • If the hard disk needs to be formatted or replaced, it will be done at the discretion of Sony. All contents of the hard disk drive will be erased, including contents that violate copyright laws.

On power sources

  • The recorder is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if the recorder itself has been turned off.
  • If you are not going to use the recorder for a long time, be sure to disconnect the recorder from the wall outlet. To disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead), grasp the plug itself; never pull the cord.

On placement

  • Place the recorder in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent heat build-up in the recorder.
  • Do not place the recorder on a soft surface such as a rug that might block the ventilation holes.
  • Do not place the recorder in a confined space such as a bookshelf or similar unit.
  • Do not place the recorder in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust, or mechanical shock.

  • Do not place the recorder in an inclined position. It is designed to be operated in a horizontal position only.

  • Keep the recorder and discs away from equipment with strong magnets, such as microwave ovens, or large loudspeakers.
  • Do not place heavy objects on the recorder.

On recording

Make trial recordings before making the actual recording.

On compensation for lost recordings

Sony is not liable and will not compensate for any lost recordings or relevant losses, including when recordings are not made due to reasons including recorder failure, or when the contents of a recording are lost or damaged as a result of recorder failure or repair undertaken to the recorder. Sony will not restore, recover, or replicate the recorded contents under any circumstances.

Copyrights

- Television programmes, films, video tapes, discs, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such material may be contrary to the provisions of the copyright laws. Also, use of this recorder with cable television transmission may require authorization from the cable television transmitter and/or programme owner.

- This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

- This Product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC corporation.

Copy guard function

Since the recorder has a copy guard function, programmes received through an external tuner (not supplied) may contain copy protection signals (copy guard function) and as such may not be recordable, depending on the type of signal.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

Caution: This recorder is capable of holding a still video image or on-screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still video image or on-screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Plasma display panels and projection televisions are especially susceptible to this.

If you have any questions or problems concerning your recorder, please consult your nearest Sony dealer.

About this manual

Check your model name

The instructions in this manual are for 4 models: RDR-HXD770, RDR-HXD870, RDR-HXD970 and RDR-HXD1070. Check your model name by looking at the front panel of the recorder.

  • In this manual, the internal hard disk drive is written as “HDD,” and “disc” is used as a general reference for the HDD, DVDs, or CDs unless otherwise specified by the text or illustrations.
  • Icons, such as , DVD at the top of each explanation indicate what kind of media can be used with the function being explained.
  • Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote. You can also use the controls on the recorder if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote.
  • The on-screen display illustrations used in this manual may not match the graphics displayed on your TV screen.
  • The explanations regarding DVDs in this manual refer to DVDs created on this recorder. The explanations do not apply to DVDs that are created on other recorders and played back on this recorder.

Table of Contents

WARNING 2

Precautions 3

Quick Guide to Disc Types 10

Recordable and playable discs 10

Playable discs ....12

Hookups and Settings 14

Hooking Up the Recorder 14

Checking hookup and setting methods ..... 14

Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Controller ..... 15

Using the set top box receiver control function 15

A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting) 16

B: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting) ..... 17

C: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting) ..... 18

Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord ..... 19

About the SMARTLINK features (for SCART connections only). . . . . . 21

About the HDMI Control functions for 'BRAVIA' Theatre Sync (for HDMI connections only) 21

Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord ..... 22

Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead .....23

Step 5: Preparing the Remote .....24

Controlling TVs with the remote 24

If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder....25

Changing programme positions of the recorder using the remote ..... 26

Step 6: Easy Setup .....26

Setting up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus+ ^® system (For analogue broadcasting) 28

Connecting a VCR or Similar Device 31

Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack .... 31

Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Connecting an External Decoder 33

Connecting a decoder 33

Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programme positions....34

Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

  1. Inserting a Disc 36
  2. Recording a Programme .... 36 Checking the disc status while recording .... 37
  3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List) 38
  4. Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information ..... 40
  5. Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme 42
  6. Labelling and Protecting a Disc .... 43 Labelling a disc .... 43 Protecting a disc .... 44
  7. Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment (Finalise) ..... 45 Unfinalising a disc ..... 46
  8. Reformatting a Disc 47

Guide to Digital Services (For Freeview users only) .....48

EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) 48
Viewing a list of available channels. 48
Programme Information 49
Displaying the programme information 49
Viewing a Digital Text Service 50
Selecting digital text from dedicated digital teletext channels. . . . . . . . 50
Selecting digital text from other channels 51

Timer Recording (For Freeview users only) .....52

Before Recording 52
Recording mode 52
Unrecordable pictures. 53
Timer Recording (Standard/EPG) 53
Setting the timer manually (Standard)....53
Recording TV programmes using the EPG. 55
Recording programmes using Series Recording 57
Using the Quick Timer function 58
Adjusting the recording picture quality 59
Creating chapters in a title 59
Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings (Timer List) 60
Recording from Connected Equipment 61

GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting only) .....63

Introduction to the GUIDE Plus+ System 63

Learning the common elements 63

Troubleshooting guide. 64

Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus+ System 65

Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+ System ..... 66

Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information (My TV) 67

Setting a profile 67

Selecting and watching a programme from My TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus+ System 68

Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host channel manually .....69

Checking programme positions. 69

Disabling programme positions 70

Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only) .....71

Before Recording 71

Recording mode 71

Recording stereo and bilingual programmes. 72

Unrecordable pictures 72

Timer Recording (GUIDE Plus+/Manual) 73

One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+ (in the UK only)) 73

Setting the timer manually....74

Using the Quick Timer function 75

Adjusting the recording picture quality....76

Creating chapters in a title. 77

Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings 77

Changing timer settings. 77

Cancelling timer settings 78

Recording from Connected Equipment 79

Playback 80

Playing the Recorded Programme/DVD 80

Playback options 82

Playing a specific portion repeatedly (A-B Repeat). 84

Playing repeatedly (Repeat) 84

Creating your own programme (Programme) 85

Adjusting the picture quality. 85

Pausing a TV Broadcast (TV Pause/Pause Live TV) 87

Playing from the Beginning of the Programme You Are Recording

(Chase Play) 88

Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another

(Simultaneous Rec and Play) 88

Searching for a Time/Title/Chapter/Track, etc. 89

Erasing and Editing 91

Before Editing 91

Erasing and Editing a Title 92

Editing multiple titles (Multi-Mode)....93

Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) 93

Dividing a title (Divide)....94

Erasing and Editing a Chapter 95

Dividing a chapter (Divide) 95

Erasing a chapter (Erase) 96

Combining multiple chapters (Combine)....96

Creating and Editing a Playlist 96

Moving a Playlist title (Move) 97

Combining multiple Playlist titles (Combine)....97

Dividing a Playlist title (Divide) 97

Moving a chapter (Move) 97

Dubbing (HDD ↔ DVD) .....98

Before Dubbing 98

HDD/DVD Dubbing 99

Dubbing Using Dubbing List 100

Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup) 103

DV Camcorder Dubbing 104

Before DV Camcorder Dubbing 104

Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing 104

Dubbing an Entire DV Format Tape (DV One Touch Dubbing) ..... 106

Dubbing Selected Scenes (Manual Dubbing) 106

Playing from a DV Camcorder 107

Audio Tracks ....108

Playing Audio Tracks from CD/DVD 108

Playback options....108

Playing a specific portion repeatedly (A-B Repeat). 109

Playing repeatedly (Repeat) 109

Creating your own programme (Programme) 110

Searching for an Audio Track 111

About Jukebox 112

Preparing for Using Jukebox 112

Connecting the USB device 112

Copying audio tracks (DISC → HDD) 113

Copying an album (USB → HDD) 113

Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox/USB Device 114

Playback options....115

Playing repeatedly (Repeat) 115

Creating your own programme (Programme) 116

Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox 117

JPEG Image Files 118

About the "Photo Album" Function 118

Preparing for Using the "Photo Album" Function 118

Connecting the USB device 118

Copying JPEG image files to the HDD (DISC/USB → HDD)....118

Copying all JPEG image files from the connected USB device (USB → DVD-RW/DVD-R)....119

Copying JPEG image files or albums on the HDD (HDD ↔ HDD) . . . 119

Copying JPEG image albums to a disc (HDD → DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . 120

Copying JPEG image files to a disc (HDD → DVD-RW/DVD-R) ..... 121

Using the "Photo Album" List 122

Viewing a JPEG image file 124

Playing a slideshow....124

Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD 125

Printing JPEG Image Files 126

Settings and Adjustments 128

Disc Settings (Disc Setup) 128

Recorder Settings (Basic) 129

Aerial Reception Settings (Digital Tuner) 131

Replace Channels 131

Add New Channels 131

Channel Sort 131

Channel Options 132

Auto Skip 132

Signal Check 132

D.TV Language 132

Aerial Reception Settings (Analog Tuner) 133

Auto Channel Setting. 133

Manual CH Setting 133

Channel Swapping 135

Video Settings (Video In/Out) 136

Audio Input Settings (Audio In) 137

Audio Output Settings (Audio Out) 138

Language Settings (Language) 140

Recording Settings (Recording) 141

Playback Settings (Playback) 144

Limitation Settings (Parental Lock) 145

HDMI Settings (HDMI Output) 147

Other Settings (Options) 149

Options 149

Options 2 150

Additional Information 151

Troubleshooting 151

Resetting the Recorder 158

Notes About This Recorder 159

Specifications 160

Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files, and DivX Video Files 161

About i.LINK 163

Guide to Parts and Controls 164

Language Code List 167

Country/Area Code 168

Index 169

Quick Guide to Disc Types

Recordable and playable discs

Type Disc LogoIcon used in this manualFormatting (new discs)Compatibility with other DVD players (finalising)
Hard disk drive (internal)VR modeSONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 1HDDSelect “Video Mode Off” in “HDD Recording Format” (page 144)Dub HDD contents to a DVD (VR mode) to play on other DVD players
Video modeSelect “Video Mode On” (default) in “HDD Recording Format” (page 144)Dub HDD contents to a DVD (Video mode) to play on other DVD players
DVD+RWSONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 2 DVD + ReWritable SONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 3 DVD + ReWritable+RWAutomatically formatted in +VR mode (DVD+RW VIDEO)Playable on DVD+RW compatible players (automatically finalised)
DVD-RWVR modeSONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 4 RW SONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 5 RW SONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 6-RWVRFormat in VR mode (page 36)Playable only on VR mode compatible players (finalisation unnecessary)
Video mode-RW VideoFormat in Video mode (page 36)Playable on most DVD players (finalisation necessary) (page 45)
DVD+R DVD+R DLSONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 7 DVD+R SONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 8 DVD+R+RAutomatically formatted in +VR mode (DVD+R VIDEO)Playable on most DVD players (finalisation necessary) (page 45)
DVD-R DVD-R DLVR modeSONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 9 R R4.7 SONY RDR-HXD770 - Quick Guide to Disc Types - 10 R DL 4X/2X-RVRFormat in VR mode (page 36)*1 Formatting is performed in the “Format” setup (page 47).Playable only on DVD-R in VR mode compatible players (finalisation necessary) (page 45)
Video mode-RVideoAutomatically formatted in Video modePlayable on most DVD players (finalisation necessary) (page 45)

Usable disc versions (as of April 2007)

  • 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs
  • 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2 with CPRM ^2 )
    • 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs
  • 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0, Ver.2.1 with CPRM ^2 )
  • 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double Layer) discs
  • 8x-speed or slower DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs (Ver.3.0 with CPRM ^2 )

“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R DL,” “DVD-R,” and “DVD-R DL” are trademarks.

*1 When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into this recorder, it is automatically formatted in Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR mode, format in the “Format” setup (page 47).
^*2 CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images.

Discs that cannot be recorded on

- DVD-RAMs

playable discs

Type Disc LogoIcon used in this manualCharacteristics
DVD VIDEOSONY RDR-HXD770 - playable discs - 1DVDDiscs such as movies that can be purchased or rentedThis recorder also recognises DVD-RAMs* as DVD Video compatible discs.
VIDEO CDSONY RDR-HXD770 - playable discs - 2VCDVIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format
CDSONY RDR-HXD770 - playable discs - 3CDMusic CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD format
DATA DVD —DATA DVDDVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RAMs* containing MP3 audio tracks or DivX video filesDVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-ROMs containing MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image files or DivX video files
DATA CD —DATA CDCD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs containing either MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image files or DivX video files

“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” are trademarks.

DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

DivX ^® is a video file compression technology, developed by DivX, Inc.

* If the DVD-RAM has a removable cartridge, remove the cartridge before playback.

Discs that cannot be played

  • PHOTO CDs
  • CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are recorded in a format different from the formats mentioned in the table above.
    • Data part of CD-Extras
    • BDs
  • HD DVDs
    • Discs recorded with an AVCHD-compatible DVD video camera

  • DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs that do not contain DVD Video, DivX video, JPEG image files, or MP3 audio tracks.

  • DVD Audio discs
  • Cartridge-only type DVD-RAMs.
    • HD layer on Super Audio CDs
  • DVD VIDEOs with a different region code (page 13).
    • DVDs that were recorded on a different recorder and not correctly finalised.

Maximum recordable number of titles

Disc Number of titles
HDD* 999
DVD-RW/DVD-R 99
DVD+RW/DVD+R 49
DVD+R DL 49
DVD-R DL 99

* The maximum length for one title is 12 hours.

Note on playback operations of DVD VIDEOS/VIDEO CDs

Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers. Since this recorder plays DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. See the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs.

Region code (DVD VIDEO only)

Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOS (playback only) labelled with identical region codes. This system is used to protect copyrights.

DVD VIDEOs labelled Will also play on this recorder.

If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the message “Playback prohibited by region code.” will appear on the TV screen.

Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region code indication may be labelled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by area restrictions.

MODEL No. RDR-XXXX DVD RECORDER ~AC 000V DDR5 00W TOMATO: MODE IN XXX NO. Region code

This product is designed to play back discs that conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.

Recently, various music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies are being marketed by some record companies. Please be aware that among those discs, there are some that do not conform to the CD standard and may not be playable by this product.

Note on DualDiscs

A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which mates DVD recorded material on one side with digital audio material on the other side. However, since the audio material side does not conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard, playback on this product is not guaranteed.

Notes

  • Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, DVD-RAMs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be played on this recorder due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the recording device and authoring software. The disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalised. For more information, see the operating instructions for the recording device.
  • You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same DVD-RW. To change the disc's format, reformat the disc (page 47). Note that the disc's contents will be erased after reformatting.
  • You cannot shorten the time required for recording even with high-speed discs.
  • It is recommended that you use discs with “For Video” printed on their packaging.
  • You cannot add new recordings to DVD+Rs, DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (Video mode) that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment.
  • In some cases, you may not be able to add new recordings to DVD+RWs that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment. If you do add a new recording, note that this recorder will rewrite the DVD menu.
  • You cannot edit recordings on DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs that are made on other DVD equipment.
  • If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this recorder, the data may be erased.
  • You may not be able to record, edit, or dub on some recordable discs, depending on the disc.
  • Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or played on this recorder. This may cause the recorder to malfunction.

Hooking Up the Recorder

Follow steps 1 through 6 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder. Do not connect the mains lead until you reach “Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead” on page 23.

Notes

  • See “Specifications” (page 160) for a list of supplied accessories.
  • Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.
  • Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.
  • You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack.
  • Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting.

Checking hookup and setting methods

The recorder incorporates both analogue and digital tuners. The programme guide and timer recording method differ depending on which one you select. Depending on the broadcasts you are receiving and your equipment, select one of the following aerial hookups. Do NOT set “LINE 1 In” to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137) when making connection B.

When you receive Hookup Programme guide Timer recording using programme guide
Freeview A (page 16) Digital Service(page 48)See page 52.
Satellite, CableB (page 17)GUIDE Plus+ (page 63)See page 71.
Terrestrial C (page 18) GUIDE Plus+ (page 63) See page 71.

Note

Beginning in 2008, analogue broadcasts in the UK will end area by area, with all analogue broadcasts scheduled to end by 2012. After analogue broadcasts end in your area, you will not be able to use hookup C to view TV broadcasts. At that time, change to hookup A to view digital broadcasts.

Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Controller

If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals

This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals, connect the TV SCART connector on the set top box receiver to the LINE 1/DECODER jack, and set “LINE 1 In” to “RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137). See the instructions supplied with the set top box receiver.

Using the set top box receiver control function

The set top box receiver control function can be used with hookup B. It allows the recorder to control a set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller. The recorder controls programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording. You can also use the recorder's remote control to change programme positions on the set top box receiver whenever the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on.

To use the set top box receiver control function, you need to connect the set top box controller (page 17). After setting up the set top box receiver control, check that the recorder can correctly control the set top box receiver (page 28).

Notes

  • If your aerial is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead cable), use an external aerial connector (not supplied) to connect the aerial to the recorder.
  • If you have separate cables for AERIAL antennas, use an AERIAL UHF/VHF band mixer (not supplied) to connect the aerial to the recorder.
  • If you disconnect the recorder's mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected set top box receiver.

A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting)

Use this hookup if you can receive Freeview.

With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position on the recorder.

TV to aerial input Aerial cable (supplied) Wall to DIGITAL AERIAL INTO DIGITAL AERIAL O DIGITAL AERIAL DVD recorder

SONY RDR-HXD770 - A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting) - 2
: Signal flow

If you want to view both analogue and digital broadcasts

This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analogue TV broadcasts.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - If you want to view both analogue and digital broadcasts - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    TV["TV"] -->|to aerial input| A["Aerial cable (supplied)"]
    TV -->|to ANALOG AERIAL IN| B["ANALOG AERIAL OUT"]
    TV -->|to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT| C["Digital AERIAL OUT"]
    A -->|Aerial cable (not supplied)| C
    C --> D["DVD recorder"]
    E["Wall"] --> F["to DIGITAL AERIAL IN"]
    style TV fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style A fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

B: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting)

With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver.

To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - B: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Wall"] --> B["Set top box receiver"]
    B --> C["ANT IN TO TV"]
    C --> D["Aerial cable*1 (not supplied)"]
    D --> E["to ANALOG AERIAL IN"]
    E --> F["ANALOG AERIAL OUT"]
    F --> G["Aerial cable (supplied)"]
    G --> H["TV"]
    H --> I["to aerial input"]
    I --> J["DVD recorder"]
    J --> K["G-LINK"]
    K --> L["SCART cord*2 (not supplied)"]
    L --> M["To G-LINK"]
    M --> N["Set top box controller (page 15)"]
    N --> O["Place the set top box controller near the remote sensor on the set top box receiver."]

SONY RDR-HXD770 - B: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting) - 2
: Signal flow

*1 If your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack, connect the aerial to the recorder's ANALOG AERIAL IN jack.
*2 Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector.

C: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting)

Use this hookup if you watch cable programme positions without a set top box receiver. Also use this hookup if you are only connecting an aerial antenna.

With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position on the recorder.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - C: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Wall"] -->|to ANALOG AERIAL IN| B["ANALOG AERIAL OUT"]
    B -->|to ANALOG AERIAL OUT| C["TV"]
    C -->|to aerial input| D["Aerial cable (supplied)"]
    D -->|to ANALOG AERIAL IN| E["DVD recorder"]
    E --> F["Antenna 1.0"]

SONY RDR-HXD770 - C: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting) - 2
: Signal flow

Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord

Select one of the following patterns, A through E, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to view pictures.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["TV, projector, or audio component"] --> B["TV"]
    B --> C["Audio/video cord (not supplied)"]
    C --> D["SCART cord (not supplied)"]
    D --> E["Line 2 OUT (VIDEO)"]
    E --> F["(yellow)"]
    E --> G["to LINE 3 - TV"]
    G --> H["Line 2 OUT (VIDEO)"]
    H --> I["(green)"]
    H --> J["(red)(blue)"]
    J --> K["to COMPONENT VIDEO OUT"]
    K --> L["(green)"]
    K --> M["(red)(blue)"]
    M --> N["COMPONENT VIDEO IN"]
    N --> O["Y"]
    N --> P["Pb/Cb"]
    N --> Q["PR/CR"]
    O --> R["TV, projector, or audio component"]
    P --> S["TV, projector, or audio component"]
    Q --> T["TV, projector, or audio component"]
    U["DVD recorder"] --> V["S-video cord (not supplied)"]
    V --> W["HDMI cord (not supplied)"]
    W --> X["HDMI IN"]
    X --> Y["TV, projector, or audio component"]

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord - 2
: Signal flow

A SCART input jack

When setting "LINE 3 Out" to "S-Video" or "RGB" in the "Video In/Out" setup (page 136), use a SCART cord that conforms to the selected signal.

B Video input jack

You will enjoy standard quality images.

© S VIDEO input jack

You will enjoy high quality images.

D Component video input jacks (Y, P_B/C_B , P_R/C_R )

You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction and high quality images.

If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p format signals, use this connection and set “Progressive” to “Compatible” in the “Easy Setup” setup (page 26). Then set

“Component Video Out” to “Progressive” in the “Video In/Out” setup to send progressive video signals. For details, see “Component Video Out” on page 136.

E HDMI input jack

Use a certified HDMI cord (not supplied) to enjoy high quality digital picture and sound through the HDMI OUT jack.

When connecting a Sony TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function, see page 21.

To see the signals from the connected set top box receiver when the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only, turn the recorder on.

When connecting to the HDMI jack

Follow the steps below. Improper handling may damage the HDMI jack and the connector.

1 Carefully align the HDMI jack on the rear of the recorder and the HDMI connector by checking their shapes. Make sure the connector is not upside down or tilted.

HOME OUT No

HDMI OUT HDMI

2 Insert the HDMI connector straight into the HDMI jack.

Do not bend or apply pressure to the HDMI connector.

HDMI OUT HDMI

Notes

  • Be sure to disconnect the HDMI cord when moving the recorder.
  • Do not apply too much pressure to the cabinet wall, if you place the recorder on the cabinet with the HDMI cord connected. It may damage the HDMI jack or the HDMI cord.
  • Do not twist the HDMI connector while connecting to or disconnecting from the HDMI jack to avoid damaging the HDMI jack and connector.

When playing "wide screen" images

Some recorded images may not fit your TV screen. To change the picture size, see page 144.

If you are connecting to a VCR

Connect your VCR to the LINE 1/ DECODER jack on the recorder (page 31).

Notes

- Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.

- Do not make connections A and E at the same time.

- When you connect the recorder to your TV via the SCART jacks, the TV's input source is set to the recorder automatically when you start playback. If necessary, press the TV → button on the remote to return the input to the TV.

- If you connect the recorder to a TV with SMARTLINK, set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in the “Video In/Out” setup.

- You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack (connection E) to DVI jacks that are not HDCP compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).

- Component video and RGB signals are not output when using the HDMI connection.

* This DVD recorder incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered upside down trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

If the connected TV (or other connected equipment such as a set top box) complies with SMARTLINK, NexTView Link ^3 , MEGALOGIC ^1 , EASYLINK ^2 , CINEMALINK ^2 , Q-Link ^3 , EURO VIEW LINK ^4 , or T-V LINK ^*5 , you can enjoy the following SMARTLINK features.

• TV Direct Rec. (page 37)
• One-Touch Play (page 81)
- Preset Download

You can download the tuner preset data from your TV to this recorder, and tune the recorder according to that data in “Easy Setup.”

- NexTView Download You can easily set the timer by using the NexTView Download function on your TV.

Set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 136) and “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder Only” in the “Options” setup (page 150).

Notes

  • For correct SMARTLINK connection, you will need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins. Refer to your TV's instruction manual as well for this connection.
  • Not all TVs respond to the functions above.

*1 "MEGALOGIC" is a registered trademark of Grundig Corporation.
*2 "EASYLINK" and "CINEMALINK" are trademarks of Philips Corporation.
*3 "Q-Link" and "NexTView Link" are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.
*4 "EURO VIEW LINK" is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
*5 "T-V LINK" is a trademark of JVC Corporation.

About the HDMI Control functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre Sync (for HDMI connections only)

By connecting Sony components that are compatible with the HDMI Control function with an HDMI cord (not supplied), operation is simplified as below:

• One-Touch Play (page 81)
- System Power-Off When you turn the TV off by using the power button on the TV's remote, the components compatible with the HDMI Control function turn off automatically.

To prepare for the 'BRAVIA' Theatre Sync features

Set “HDMI Control” to “On” in the “HDMI Output” setup (page 148). For details on TV settings, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

Notes

  • Depending on the connected component, the HDMI Control function may not work. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the component.
  • The recorder supports only the playback option of HDMI Control. “Player” appears on the TV screen when using the HDMI Control functions.

Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord

Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to listen to sound.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Speaker"] --> B["Audio component with a decoder"]
    C["Rear (L)"] --> B
    D["Front (L)"] --> B
    E["Centre"] --> B
    B --> F["To HDMI OUT"]
    F --> G["HDMI cord (not supplied)"]
    G --> H["to HDMI OUT"]
    H --> I["Digital Out (COAXIAL)"]
    J["Speaker"] --> K["To coaxial/HDMI digital input"]
    L["Front (R)"] --> K
    M["Subwoofer"] --> K
    N["Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)"] --> K
    O["Digital OUT (PENOT/R/PED/SOLV) DIGITAL"] --> P["To Digital OUT (COAXIAL)"]
    Q["Line 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)"] --> R["Line 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)"]
    S["Video"] --> T["Line 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)"]
    U["Vision"] --> V["(white)"]
    U --> W["(red)"]
    U --> X["(yellow)*"]
    Y["Input"] --> Z["(yellow)"]
    Y --> AA["(white)"]
    Y --> AB["(red)"]
    AC["TV, projector, or audio component"] --> AD["Output"]
    AE["Signal flow"] --> AF["Signal flow"]

* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 19).

A Digital audio input jack

If your audio component has a Dolby ^1 Digital, DTS ^2 , or MPEG audio decoder and a digital input jack, use this connection. You can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS (5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround effects.

If you connect a Sony audio component that is compatible with the HDMI control function, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the audio component.

B Audio L/R (left/right) input jacks

This connection will use your TV's or audio component's two speakers for sound.

Hint

For correct speaker location, see the operating instructions supplied with the connected components.

Notes

  • Do not connect your TV's audio output jacks to the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) jacks at the same time. This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV's speakers.
  • With connection Ⓑ, do not connect the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) and LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks to your TV's audio output jacks at the same time. This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV's speakers.
  • With connection Ⓐ, after you have completed the connection, make the appropriate settings in the “Audio Out” setup (page 138). Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise will come from your speakers.
  • When you connect the recorder to an audio component using an HDMI cord, you will need to do one of the following:
  • Connect the audio component to the TV with the HDMI cord, or
  • Connect the recorder to the TV with a video cord other than HDMI cord (component video cord, S-video cord, or audio/video cord).

*1 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
^*2 “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead

Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN terminal of the recorder. Then plug the recorder and TV mains leads (AC power cords) into the mains. After you connect the mains lead, you must wait for a short while before operating the recorder.

You can operate the recorder once the front panel display lights up and the recorder enters standby mode.

If you connect additional equipment to this recorder (page 31), be sure to connect the mains lead after all connections are complete.

① to AC IN ② to mains

Step 5: Preparing the Remote

You can control the recorder using the supplied remote. Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries by matching the ⊕ and ⊖ ends on the batteries to the markings inside the battery compartment. When using the remote, point it at the remote sensor in the recorder.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Step 5: Preparing the Remote - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a remote control panel with handle and buttons (no text or symbols)

Notes

  • If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD recorder or player, change the command mode number for this recorder (page 25).
  • Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage and corrosion. Should leakage occur, do not touch the liquid with bare hands. Observe the following:
  • Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or batteries of different manufacturers.
  • Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.
  • If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries.
  • If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid inside the battery compartment, and insert new batteries.
  • Do not expose the remote sensor (marked the front panel) to strong light, such as direct sunlight or a lighting apparatus. The recorder may not respond to the remote.
  • When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code number and Command Mode may be reset to the default setting. Set the appropriate code number and Command Mode again.

Controlling TVs with the remote

You can adjust the remote's signal to control your TV.

Notes

  • Depending on the connected unit, you may not be able to control your TV with some or all of the buttons below.
  • If you enter a new code number, the code number previously entered will be erased.

Number buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 TV/DVD DISPLAY ■ TV I/O TV TV PROG +/-

1 Hold down TV I/ ^① located at the bottom of the remote.

Do not press the I/⏻ button at the top of the remote.

2 With TV I/ ^① pressed down, enter the TV's manufacturer code using the number buttons.

For instance, to enter "09," press "0" then "9." After you enter the last number, release the TV I/O button.

Code numbers of controllable TVs

If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV.

Manufacturer Code number

Sony 01 (default)
Grundig 11
Hitachi 24
ITT/Nokia 15, 16
JVC 33
Loewe 45
Nokia 69, 73
Panasonic 17, 49
Philips 06, 07, 08, 72
Saba 12, 13, 74
Samsung 22, 23, 71
Sanyo 25
Sharp 29
Telefunken36
Thomson43, 75
Toshiba38

The remote performs the following:

ButtonsOperations
TV I/⏻Turns your TV on or off.
TV △ (volume) +/-Adjusts the volume of your TV.
TV PROG +/-Selects the programme position on your TV.
TV ➕ (input select)Switches your TV’s input source.

To operate the TV/DVD button (for SCART connections only)

The TV/DVD button switches between TV mode and DVD mode. Press the TV/DVD button when in stop mode or no menu appears on the TV screen. Point your remote at the recorder when using this button.

TV mode: switch to this when you use the TV's tuner mainly. When you start playback, the input source for the TV is set to the recorder automatically.

DVD mode: switch to this when you use the recorder's tuner mainly.

To check the current mode, press DISPLAY (page 40).

If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder

If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the command mode number for this recorder and the supplied remote to one that differs from the other Sony DVD recorder or player after you have completed “Step 6: Easy Setup.” The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3. You can check the current Command Mode in the front panel display. For details, see page 149.

The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3. The remote does not function if different command modes are set for the recorder and remote. Set the same command mode.

Changing programme positions of the recorder using the remote

You can change programme positions of the recorder using the number buttons.

Number buttons INPUT ENTER

Example: for channel 50

Press "5," "0," then press ENTER.

Hint

If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks, you can switch between digital mode and analogue mode using the INPUT button.

Step 6: Easy Setup

Make the basic adjustments by following the on-screen instructions in "Easy Setup." Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit the "Easy Setup" function during this procedure.

EXIT/ RETURN GUIDE ENTER TV I/O

1 Turn on the recorder and your TV. Then switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on your TV screen.

The "Language" display appears.

- If the “Language” display does not appear, select “Easy Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in the System Menu (page 130).

2 Select a language for the on-screen displays using /// , and press ENTER.

The initial settings message appears.

3 Select "Start" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen instructions to make the following settings.

◆ D.TV Auto Channel Setting

If the aerial cable is connected to the DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup A), select “Auto Scan.” Then, select your country/region using / , and press ENTER. The recorder will automatically capture and store the available TV and Radio channels.

If the aerial cable is connected to the ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B or C), select “Do not set.”

For details, see page 15.

◆ A.TV Auto Channel Setting

If the aerial cable is connected to the ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B or C) and the TV is connected to this recorder not using SMARTLINK, select "Auto Scan." Then, select your country/region using / , and press ENTER. The programme position order will be set according to the country/region you set.

If the aerial cable is connected to the ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B or C) and the TV is connected to this recorder with SMARTLINK, select "Download from TV" (For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV). Then, select your country/region using / , and press ENTER. The tuner preset data will be downloaded from your TV to this recorder.

For details, see page 15.

If the aerial cable is connected to the DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup A) only, or to skip this setting, select "Do not set." Then, select your country/region using / , and press ENTER. To set the programme positions manually, see page 131.

◆ Clock Setting

The recorder will automatically set the clock when any digital channels have been scanned and stored. Go to the “EPG Type Select” setting.

Select “Auto” when a programme position in your local area broadcasts a time signal. The “Auto Clock Setting” display appears.

1 Select the programme position of the station that carries a time signal using / .
2 Select "Start" using ↓, and press ENTER. If a clock signal cannot be found, press ⬇ RETURN, and set the clock manually.

Select “Manual” to set the clock manually. The “Manual Clock Setting” display appears.

1 Select the time zone for your area using / , and press .
2 Select "On" if you are now on summer time, and press ENTER.
3 Set the day, month, year, hour, and minutes using /// , and press ENTER to start the clock.

◆ EPG Type Select

Select the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) type to use.

If no programme positions for digital broadcasts are found after scanning, the “EPG Type Select” display does not appear. The EPG type is automatically set to the country/area you select when setting the program positions.

Select “Guide (Digital)” to use the digital electronic programme guide (see “Guide to Digital Services (For Freeview users only)” on page 48).

Select "Guide (Digital)" if you receive only digital broadcasts.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Clock Input Power HELP EPG T Easy S EPG Type Select GUIDE Plus+ ■ Guide (Digital)

Select “GUIDE Plus+” to use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide (see “GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting only)” on page 63).

◆ TV Screen Size (page 144)

If you have a wide-screen TV, select "Wide (16:9)." If you have a standard TV, select "Standard (4:3)." This will determine how "wide-screen" images are displayed on your TV.

◆ Progressive

When you connect a progressive format TV to this recorder using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, select "Compatible."

◆ HDD caution messages

Read the HDD caution messages, and press ENTER.

4 Select "Finish Setup" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

"Easy Setup" is completed.

To return to the previous step

Press 📋 RETURN.

Hint

If you want to run "Easy Setup" again, select "Easy Setup" in the "Basic" setup from "Initial Setup" in the System Menu (page 130).

Setting up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus+® system (For analogue broadcasting)

Follow the steps below to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and set top box controller. The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the UK only.

1 Press GUIDE.

The GUIDE Plus+ system "Basic Setup" appears.

Pr 2 26-May 10:10 Back Home Please enter a valid postal code. The postal code is required to complete the installation. Basic Setup Language English Country United Kingdom Postal Code None External Receiver 1 None External Receiver 2 None External Receiver 3 None

For users other than in the UK, go to step 4.

2 Select "Postal Code," and press ENTER.

3 Enter your postal code using ←/↑/↓/→, and press ENTER.

If “Country” is set to “Others,” you cannot enter a postal code and the GUIDE Plus+ system will not search for a host channel.

4 Select "External Receiver 1," and press ENTER.

You can also select "External Receiver 2" or "External Receiver 3" if you have connected additional set top box receivers.

5 Press ENTER to select "Continue."

6 Select the set top box receiver type using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

7 Select the provider using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

8 Select the receiver brand using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

If you select “Other providers,” you can select a receiver brand from a list of all available brands.

If your receiver brand is not on the list, select “???.”

The receiver brand list is automatically updated, so your receiver may be available at a later date. Select your brand when it becomes available. Until then, use “???.”

9 Select the connection you used for your set top box receiver using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

When the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using hookup B with both an aerial cable and a SCART cord, select either “Line1” or “Antenna.” The display asks for confirmation.

10 Press ENTER to select "Continue."

The Video Window switches to the specified programme position.

11 Select "YES" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation. If the Video Window does not switch to the specified programme position, select "NO" and press ENTER until the Video Window switches to the specified programme position.

To receive GUIDE Plus+ system data your recorder must be turned off when not in use. If your recorder is connected to a set top box receiver, be sure to leave the set top box receiver turned on. After initial setup, it may take up to 24 hours to begin receiving TV programme listings.

Note

You cannot set tuner system or “OSD Language” to a country/region or language that is not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.

If you cannot get the recorder to control your set top box receiver

Check the connection and position of the set top box controller (page 17).

If your set top box receiver still does not operate with this recorder, refer to the instructions supplied with your set top box receiver and contact your cable or satellite company to see if they can provide you with a compatible set top box receiver.

Notes

  • The list of external receivers controllable by the GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and is distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data signals. Since the time your recorder has been produced and the time you installed your recorder for the first time, new external receiver codes might have been added.
  • If the external receiver is still not on the list or is not controlled properly by the recorder, please call Customer Support to report the brand and model of your external receiver.

To fix the set top box controller to your set top box receiver

Once you have confirmed that the set top box controller controls your set top box receiver, fix it in place.

1 Remove the backing on the double-sided tape.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - To fix the set top box controller to your set top box receiver - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a device with a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2 Attach it so that the set top box controller is directly above the remote control sensor on your set top box receiver.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - To fix the set top box controller to your set top box receiver - 2

natural_image Diagram of a CD or DVD setup with two views: top shows a monitor and cable, bottom shows a CD or DVD (no text or symbols)

To change the basic GUIDE Plus+ settings

1 Press GUIDE.

The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen” appears.

2 Select "Setup" in the Menu Bar using ↑/

→, and press ENTER.

The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.

3 Select "Basic Setup" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

4 Repeat from step 2 of “Setting up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus+® system (For analogue broadcasting)” on page 28.

Connecting a VCR or Similar Device

After disconnecting the recorder's mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder.

Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack) (page 104).

For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.

To record on this recorder, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 79.

Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack

Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 1/DECODER jack of this recorder.

VCR SCART cord (not supplied) to SCART input to → LINE 1/DECODER to → LINE 3 – TV DVD recorder

Notes

  • Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.
  • If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Notes - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A[" "] --> B["VCRDVD recorder Fv"]
    B --> C[" "]

Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Notes - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["VCR TV"] --> B["DVD recorder"]
    B --> C["Line input 1"]
    C --> D["Line input 2"]
    D --> A
  • The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder's LINE 1/DECODER jack.
  • To watch the connected VCR or similar device's pictures through the recorder while the recorder is in standby mode, set "Power Save" to "Off" (default) in the "Basic" setup (page 130).
  • When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the TV/DVD button on the remote.
  • If you disconnect the recorder's mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected VCR.

Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel

Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["OUTPUT"] --> B["S VIDEO"]
    A --> C["VIDEO"]
    A --> D["AUDIO"]
    A --> E["R"]
    B --> F["S-video cord (not supplied)"]
    C --> G["Audio/video cord (not supplied)"]
    D --> H["to LINE 2 IN"]
    E --> I["LINE 2 IN"]
    J["VCR, etc."] --> A
    K["DV3 recorder"] --> L["Signal flow"]

Hint

When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to only the L(MONO) and VIDEO input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack.

Notes

  • Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.
  • Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment's input jack with the other equipment's output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).
  • Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.

Connecting an External Decoder

You can watch or record external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes if you connect a decoder (not supplied) to the recorder. Disconnect the recorder's mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder. Note that when you set "LINE 1 In" to "Decoder" in step 7 of "Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programme positions" (page 34), you will not be able to select "L1" because Line 1 will become a dedicated line for the decoder.

Connecting a decoder

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Connecting a decoder - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["TV"] -->|to AERIAL IN| B["Aerial cable (supplied)"]
    A -->|to SCART input| C["SCART cord (not supplied)"]
    A -->|to LINE 3 - TV| D["to AERIAL OUT to LINE 1/DECODER"]
    A -->|to SCART cord (not supplied)| E["External decoder (PAY-TV/ Canal Plus analogue decoder)"]
    D --> F["DVD recorder"]
    E --> F
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programme positions

To watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue programmes, set your recorder to receive the programme positions using the on-screen display.

In order to set the programme positions correctly, be sure to follow all of the steps below.

Number buttons SYSTEM MENU EXIT/ RETURN ENTER

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Clock Setting Input Line System Power Save HELP Setting EPG Type Select Easy Setup ▶ 0:00 ▶ PAL/SECAM ▶ Off ▶ On ▶ GUIDE Plus+ ▶ Start

3 Select "Video In/Out," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Input Colour System Component Video Out LINE 3 Out LINE 1 In NTSG on PAL TV Next Screen

4 Select "LINE 3 Out," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Input Colour System Component Video Out LINE $ Out LINE 1 In NTSG on PAL TV ■ Video S-Video RGB

5 Press ↑/↓ to select "Video" or "RGB," and press ENTER.

6 Select "LINE 1 In," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Input Colour System Component Video Out LINE 3 Out LINE 1 In NTSG on PAL TV ■ Video S-Video RGB Decoder

7 Press ↑/↓ to select "Decoder," and press ENTER.

8 Press 🎨 RETURN to return the cursor to the left column.

9 Select "Analog Tuner," and press ENTER.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programme positions - 6

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Initial Setup"] --> B["Basic"]
    A --> C["Digital Tuner"]
    A --> D["Analog Tuner"]
    A --> E["Video In/Out"]
    A --> F["Audio In"]
    A --> G["Audio Out"]
    A --> H["Language"]
    A --> I["Recording"]
    B --> J["Auto Channel Setting"]
    C --> K["Manual CH Setting"]
    D --> L["Channel Swapping"]
    J --> M["Auto Scan Download from TV"]
    K --> M
    L --> M

10 Select "Manual CH Setting," and press ENTER.

11 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.
12 Select your country/region, and press ENTER.

Programme position
Skip Off CH System Western Euro Channel 1 AFT On Level — Sound System B/G Name AAB Decoder Off

13 Select the desired programme position using I◄◄/►►I or number buttons.
14 Select "Channel" using ↑/↓.
15 Select the external decoder programme position using ←/→.
16 Select "Sound System" using ↑/↓.
17 Press ←/→ to select an available TV system, B/G, D/K, I, or L.

To receive broadcasts in France, select "L."

18 Select "Decoder" using ↑/↓.

19 Select "On" using ←/→, and press ENTER.

To return to the previous step

Press 📌 RETURN.

Notes

  • If you disconnect the recorder's mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected decoder.
  • To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes during recording, press the PROGRAM + button on the recorder (“SCART THRU” appears on the front panel display). To return to the previous display, press the PROGRAM – button on the recorder (“SCART NORM” appears on the front panel display). The recorder automatically switches to the programme tuned by the recorder’s tuner after the recording has finished. To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes while the recorder is in standby mode, set “Power Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic” setup (page 130).

Eight Basic Operations

— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

1. Inserting a Disc

+RW -RWVR -RW Video +R -RVR -R Video DVD VCD CD DATA DVD DATA CD

(open/ close) DVD

1 Press DVD.
2 Press ▲ (open/close), and place a disc on the disc tray.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Inserting a Disc - 3

natural_image Illustration of a hand using a circular disc on a baseplate, no text or symbols present

Recording/playing side facing down

3 Press ▲ (open/close) to close the disc tray.

Wait until "LOAD" disappears from the front panel display.

Unused DVDs are formatted automatically.

  • For DVD-RW discs DVD-RWs are formatted in the recording format (VR mode or Video mode) set by “Format DVD-RW” of “Basic” in the “Disc Setup” setup (page 128).
  • For DVD-R discs DVD-Rs are automatically formatted in Video mode. To format an unused DVD-R in VR mode, format the disc in the “Format” setup (page 47) before you make a recording.

If the disc is recordable on this recorder, you can manually re-format the disc to make a blank disc (page 47).

2. Recording a Programme

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

This section introduces the basic operation to record a current TV programme to the hard disk (HDD) or to a disc (DVD). For an explanation of how to make timer recordings, see page 52 (Digital Mode) or page 71 (Analogue Mode).

HDD DVD PROG +/- INPUT TV/DVD DISPLAY TV PAUSE REC MODE REC STOP TV

1 Press HDD or DVD.

If you want to record to a DVD, insert a recordable DVD.

2 Press PROG +/- to select the programme position or input source you want to record.

3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode.

Each time you press the button, the display on the TV screen changes as follows:

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode. - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    HQ --> HSP --> SP --> LSP --> ESP
    MN* <-- SEP <-- SLP <-- EP <-- LP

* Available when “Manual Rec. Mode” is set to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording” setup (page 141).

For more details about the recording mode, see page 71.

4 Press ● REC.

Recording starts.

When recording to the HDD, recording stops after 12 hours of continuous recording or when the HDD is full.

When recording to a DVD, recording stops when the DVD is full.

To stop recording

Press ■ REC STOP.

Note that it may take a few seconds for recorder to stop recording.

To watch another TV programme while recording

If your TV is connected to the LINE 3 - TV jack, set your TV to the TV input using the TV/DVD button and select the programme you want to watch. If your TV is connected to the LINE 2 OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the TV to TV input using the TV button (page 24).

When the TV is turned on and the recorder is turned off, press TV PAUSE. The recorder automatically turns on and starts recording what you are watching on the TV to the HDD. Set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the “Options 2” setup (page 150).

Hint

If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks, you can switch between digital mode and analogue mode using the INPUT button.

Notes

  • To turn off the TV Direct Rec. function, set “SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through” in the “Options” setup (page 150).
  • Some buttons, such as the TITLE LIST button or ▷ button, do not work when “TV” appears in the front panel display.
  • If you press the I/O button while recording, the recorder stops recording and turns off.
  • After pressing the ● REC button, it may take a short while to start recording.
  • You cannot change the recording mode while recording.
  • If there is a power failure, the programme you are recording may be erased.
  • You cannot watch a PAY-TV/Canal Plus programme while recording another PAY-TV/Canal Plus programme.
  • To use the TV Direct Rec. function, you must first correctly set the recorder's clock.

Checking the disc status while recording

You can check the recording information such as recording time or disc type.

Press DISPLAY during recording.

The recording information appears.

Rec. Mode SP ( 2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m ■ Stop DVD-RW Video Remain 0h52m ● Rec 4

1 Recording mode
2 Recording time
3Disc type/format
4 Recording status

Press DISPLAY to turn off the display.

3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List)

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

To play a recorded title, select the title from the Title List.

HDD DVD TITLE LIST ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER DISPLAY EXIT/ RETURN PLAY MODE

1 Press HDD or DVD.

If you select DVD, insert a DVD (see "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36).

Playback starts automatically depending on the disc.

2 Press TITLE LIST.

To show the 8-Title List, press ← to select "Title View," and press ENTER, then select "8 Titles" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

4-Title List (Example: HDD)
1 Title List (HDD) 10 Titles 2 4 Titles By Date All Genres 10 NEW 13:00 FRI 20/04 Pr 4 SLP 18:00 Fri 20/04 Pr 4 SLP 0h30m( 0.4G) 5 NEW 21:00 TUE 10/04 Pr 9 SLP 21:00 Tue 10/04 Pr 9 SLP 0h30m( 0.4G) 6 9:00 MON 02/04 Pr 3 SLP Mystery 1h00m( 0.8G) 7 20:00 FRI 30/03 Pr 5 SLP World Sports 1h00m( 0.8G) 6 HDD SP Remain 70h03m 5 3 4

8-Title List
1 Title List (HDD) 10 Titles 2 8 Titles By Date All Genres 9 NEW FRI 20/04 13:00 Fri20/04 Pr 4 SLP Pr 4 9 NEW TUE 10/04 21:00 Tue10/04 Pr 9 SLP Pr 9 8 MON 02/04 Mystery Pr 3 7 FRI 30/03 World Sports Pr 5 6 WED 28/03 Family Pr 4 5 SUN 25/03 Nature Pr 1 4 TUE 20/03 News Pr 6 3 THU 15/03 Weather Pr 2 HDD SP Remain: 70h03/m 13:00 Fri20/04 Pr4 SLP 13:00 Pr4 Resume SLP 0h15m( 0.4G) 7

1Disc type: Displays the media type, HDD or DVD.
② Total number of titles
3 Sub-menu: Press → to display the sub-menu. The sub-menu displays options applicable only to the selected item. The displayed options differ depending upon the model, situation, and disc type.

Title List (HDD) 4 Titles By Date All Genres 10 NEW 13:00 FRI 20/04 13:00 Fri 20/04 Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode 1000m (0.8G) Pr S S P 1h00m (0.8G) Sub-menu

4 Scroll bar: Appears when all of the titles do not fit on the list. To view the hidden titles, press ↑/↓.

5 Title information:

Displays the title number, title thumbnail picture ( playback picture for the selected title, still images for the other titles), recording date, recorded station name (or programme position number), recording mode, title name, and title size.

“Recording”: Indicates that the title is currently being recorded.

: Indicates protected title.

“NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly recorded (not played back) (HDD only).

COPY : Press DISPLAY to display

“.””” indicates titles

containing "Copy-Once" copy protection signals (HDD only) (page 99).

: Indicates that the title is recorded using the Update function.

Genre icons: Indicates the title's genre (HDD only).

6 Remaining time of the current disc in the current recording mode (example: SP mode)

7 Detailed information for the selected title

The resume point time is shown in the 8-Title List.

3 Select a title using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

Playback starts from the selected title.

To stop playback

Press ■ (stop).

To scroll the list display by page (Page mode)

Press ◀◀◀/▶▶▶ while the Title List is displayed. Each time you press ◀◀◀/▶▶▶, the entire Title List changes to the next/previous page of titles.

About the Title List for DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)

You can switch the Title List to show Original or Playlist titles.

1 Press ← while the Title List is displayed.

2 Select "Play List" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

3 Select "Original" or "Play List" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

To change the title order for HDD (Sort Titles)

1 Press ← while the Title List is displayed.

2 Select "Sort Titles" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

3 Select the item using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

Order Sorted

By Date In order of when the titles were recorded. The title that is recorded most recently is listed at the top.
Unseen Title In order of when the titles were recorded. The title that is recorded most recently and has not been played is listed at the top. Playlist titles are not displayed.
By Title In alphabetical order.
By Number In order of recorded title number.

To search for a title by genre (HDD only)

1 Press ← while the Title List is displayed.
2 Select "Genre" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
3 Select a genre using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

To change a title thumbnail picture (Thumbnail)

After recording, the first scene of the recording (the title) is automatically set as the thumbnail picture.

You can select a favourite scene for the thumbnail picture shown in the Title List.

1 Press TITLE LIST.

For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode), switch the Title Lists, if necessary.

2 Select a title, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

3 Select "Edit" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

4 Select "Set Thumbnail" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The display for setting the thumbnail point appears and the title starts to play.

5 While watching the playback picture, press ▷, || or ◀◀◀◀◀◀/▶▶▶ ||▶ to select the scene you want to set for a thumbnail picture, and press ||.

Playback pauses.

You can also select a scene using the PLAY MODE button (page 89).

6 Select "OK" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The scene is set for the title's thumbnail picture.

To return to the Title List, press

RETURN.

To change the thumbnail preview mode (Set Preview) (HDD only)

You can select "Quick Preview" or "Normal" for the thumbnail preview mode in the Title List. Set "Set Preview" in the "Options" setup (page 150).

To turn off the Title List

Press TITLE LIST.

Hint

You can select "Title List" from the System Menu.

Notes

  • The title names may not appear for DVDs created on other DVD recorders.
  • It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail pictures to be displayed.
    • After editing, the title thumbnail picture may change to the first scene of the recording (title).
    • After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on the source recording is cancelled.

4. Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information

HDD +RW -RWVR -RW Video +R -RVR - RVideo DVD VCD CD DATA DVD DATA CD

You can check the playing time of the current title, chapter, track, or disc. Also, you can check the disc name recorded on the DVD/CD.

DISPLAY

Press DISPLAY repeatedly.

The displays differ depending on the disc type or playing status.

In stop mode

Example: DVD-RW in VR mode

SONY RDR-HXD770 - In stop mode - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["Stop"]
    C["2"] --> D["DVD-RW VR Original"]
    E["3"] --> F["Resume HQ (1h01m/DVD) Finalised"]
    G["4"] --> H["Rem, On35m"]
    I["5"] --> J["ABC Pr1 Stereo Copy-Once"]
    K["6"] --> L["DVD Mode"]
    M["7"] --> N["8"]
    O["9"] --> P["Disc Name : World Sports"]

During playback

Example: DVD-R in Video mode

1 12 13 14 15 16 11 Play 9-2 0.00,15 DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0.00,21 Chapter Total Gh01m52s 4.32Mbps Title Name : Tennis DVD Mode 8

1 Playing status
② Shows that the Resume Play is available (page 81).
3 Current selected recording mode (remaining DVD recording time/disc type) (page 71)
4 Remaining time
5 Station name and programme position number
6 Audio setting for the current programme
7 Recording restrictions for the current programme
8 TV mode or DVD mode (page 25)
9Disc information
10 Title type (Original or Playlist) for DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode
11 Disc type/format (page 10) Displays the finalised disc in Video mode as “DVD-Video.”
12 Title number-Chapter number (page 89)
13 Playing time
14 Multi-angles indicator (page 80)
15 Copy-protected indicator (page 99)
16 Data transfer bar and rate

Hints

  • When “On Screen Display” is set to “On” (default) in the “Options” setup (page 149), information automatically appears on the screen when the recorder is operated.
  • To increase disc space, see “To open up disc space” (page 92).

Note

Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be displayed correctly.

5. Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can label a DVD, title, or programme by entering characters. You can enter up to 64 characters for a title recorded in the HDD/DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), 40 characters for a title recorded in the DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode), but the actual number of characters displayed in the menus such as the Title List will vary. The steps below explain how to change the name of the recorded programme.

Number buttons CLEAR TITLE LIST ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER EXIT/ RETURN

1 Press TITLE LIST.
2 Select a title, and press →. The sub-menu appears.
3 Select "Edit," and press ENTER.

4 Select "Title Name," and press ENTER.

The display for entering characters appears.

The current name is displayed at the input row.

Input row Input Title Name 13:00 Fn20/04 Pr 4 SLP Upper case Lower case A B C D E F G H I J K L M . . , ? | N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : : Ä A Ä Ä A Ä Ä Ç Ç Ç Ç E E I I I I # D N Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ü Ü Ü Ü Y P 8 S % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > " _ & ' * + - / ⊕ [ ¥ ] ^ + × ± ( | ) " | E = \ ; § " ⊕ ≠ - - ⊕ " ² " μ 1 . . " ≠ = 3/5 3/4 " OK Clear Space

5 Move the cursor to the point where you want to insert the character using ◀◀/▶▶.

To erase all of the characters, press and hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.

6 Select "Upper case" or "Lower case" using I◄◄/►►I.

The characters for the selected type are displayed.

The type of characters will change according to the language you select in "Easy Setup."

7 Press ←/↑/↓/→ to select the character you want to enter, and press ENTER.

The selected character appears at the input row.

To insert a space, press ■ (or select "Space," and press ENTER).

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the remaining characters.

To erase a character, move the cursor to the character at the input row, and press CLEAR (or select "Clear," and press ENTER).

To insert a character, move the cursor to the right of the point where you want to insert the character. Then select the character, and press ENTER.

To erase all of the characters, press and hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.

9 Press ■ (or select "OK," and press ENTER).

To cancel the setting, press

RETURN.

To use the number buttons

You can also use the number buttons to enter characters. Refer to the number next to each row of letters on your TV screen.

1 In step 7 above, press a number button repeatedly to select a character.

Example:

Press the number 3 button once to enter "D."

Press the number 3 button three times to enter "F."

2 Press ENTER and select the next character.

3 Press ■ (or select "OK," and press ENTER).

6. Labelling and Protecting a Disc

You can execute options effective for the entire disc in the “Disc Setup” setup.

SYSTEM MENU ENTER

Labelling a disc

+RW

-RWVR

-RWVideo

+R

-RVR

-Rvideo

1 Insert a disc. See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU. The System Menu appears.
3 Select "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW ► Next Screen ► Off ► VR Mode

4 Select "Basic," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW Next Screen

5 Select "Input Disc Name," and press ENTER.
6 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.

Enter the disc name (page 42).

Note

You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) disc name, and 40 characters for a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) disc name. The disc name may not appear when the disc is played on other DVD equipment.

Protecting a disc

-RWVR -RVR

1 Insert a disc.

See "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36.

2 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimize HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW ► Next Screen ► Off ► VR Mode

4 Select "Basic," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW Next Screen

5 Select "Protect Disc," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimize HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW On Off

6 Select "On," and press ENTER.
7 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

To cancel the protection

Select "Off" in step 6.

Hint

You can set protection for individual titles (page 92).

7. Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment (Finalise)

+RW

-RWVR

-RW Video

+R

-RVR

- RVideo

Finalising is necessary when you play discs recorded with this recorder on other DVD equipment.

When you finalise a DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode), a DVD menu will be automatically created, which can be displayed on other DVD equipment.

Before finalising, check the differences between the disc types in the table below.

Differences between disc types

+RWDiscs are automatically finalised when removed from the recorder. However, you may need to finalise the disc for certain DVD equipment, or if the recording time is short. You can edit or record on the disc even after finalising.
-RWVRFinalising is unnecessary when playing a disc on VR format compatible equipment. Even if your other DVD equipment is VR format compatible, you may need to finalise the disc, especially if the recording time is short. You can edit or record on the disc even after finalising.
-RW VideoFinalising is necessary when playing on any equipment other than this recorder. After finalising, you cannot edit or record on the disc. If you want to record on it again, unfinalise (page 46) or reformat the disc (page 47). However, if you reformat the disc, all recorded contents will be erased.
-RVRFinalising is necessary. The disc can be played only on equipment that supports DVD-R in VR mode. After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc using this recorder.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment (Finalise) - 1

Finalising is necessary when playing on any equipment other than this recorder.

After finalising, you cannot edit or record on the disc.

SYSTEM MENU ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER DISPLAY

1 Insert a disc.

See "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36.

2 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW ► Next Screen ► Off ► VR Mode

4 Select "Finalise," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD Finalise Unfinalise Next Screen xx min required

5 Select "Finalise," and press ENTER.

6 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.

For DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), the recorder starts finalising the disc. Go to step 9.

7 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only) Select a title menu style, and press ENTER.

The menu appears in the selected title menu style when the “top menu” (or “menu” for a DVD+RW/DVD+R) is selected on the DVD equipment.

8 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only) Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

The recorder starts finalising the disc.

9 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

Hint

You can check whether the disc has been finalised or not. Press DISPLAY after step 1 (page 40).

Notes

  • Depending on the condition of the disc, recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not play even if the discs are finalised.
  • The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc if it was recorded on another recorder.
  • Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD equipment may damage the recorded contents.
  • When using a DVD+RW, you can edit or record on the disc even after finalising. However, the title menu will not be displayed. Finalise the disc again to display the title menu.

Unfinalising a disc

-RWVR -RW Video

For DVD-RWs (Video mode)

DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been finalised to prohibit additional recording or editing can be unfinalised to allow further recording or editing.

For DVD-RWs (VR mode)

If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW (VR mode) that has been finalised with other DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.

Note

The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been finalised on another recorder.

1 Insert a disc.
See "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimize HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW ► Next Screen ► Off ► VR Mode

4 Select "Finalise," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimize HDD Finalise Unfinalise Next Screen

5 Select "Unfinalise," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD Finalise Unfinalise Start xx min required

6 Select "Start," and press ENTER.

The recorder starts unfinalising the disc. Unfinalising may take several minutes.

8. Reformatting a Disc

+RW -RWVR -RWVideo -RVR -RVideo

New discs are automatically formatted when inserted. If necessary, you can manually re-format a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R disc to make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs or DVD-Rs, you can select a recording format (VR mode or Video mode) according to your needs.

SYSTEM MENU ENTER

1 Insert a disc.

See "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36.

2 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimize HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW ► Next Screen ► Off ► VR Mode

4 Select "Format," and press ENTER.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD VR Mode Video Mode Format DVD+RW Start xx min required

5 Select an item, and press ENTER.

"VR Mode": Formats DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode or unrecorded discs) in VR mode.

"Video Mode": Formats DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.

"Format DVD+RW": Formats DVD+RWs.

6 Select "Start," and press ENTER.

All contents on the disc are erased.

Hint

By reformatting, you can change the recording format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-RWs that have been finalised.

Guide to Digital Services

(For Freeview users only)

EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)

The Electronic Programme Guide is a guide showing the television programme schedule for a day or more at a time on your television (via the Digital Terrestrial Television tuner included in this recorder).

The EPG provides a quick and easy way to:

• View a complete list of all available channels.
• View a channel list related to a chosen date or genre.
- Set a programme to be recorded (page 55).

Note

Digital Services availability and content depend on the broadcaster.

Digital Services are not instantly available when the recorder is first turned on.

Viewing a list of available channels

Colour buttons GUIDE INFO ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER EXIT/ RETURN PAGE - PAGE +

1 Press GUIDE.

This display consists of an information box and an 8-channel programme list covering a 30-minute period.

Example of EPG Display:

Guide (Digital) Thu,10,Aug 10:08 D001 DDE NEWS 15 10:00-11:30 DDE News News Thu,10,Aug 10:00 10:30 11:00 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News NCE Line from Prague NCE News AAC Opening... Foreign Markets-Morning... NCE 1 Mobile and Interacts Schlott... EFF News EFF News Channel J Weather Family Growth... City House Tennis J9 No Information available. Timer Jump Search

1 Indicates the currently selected channel number and station name with the programme title and genre.
2 Indicates the currently selected programme and allows you to move around the list.

3 Channel name

4 Indicates if a timer recording is associated with the programme (page 55).

5 Colour buttons

6 Indicates that short programmes that are not displayed on the list are scheduled.

7 Truncated programme title in case the name is too long to be displayed in the cell.

8Time slot

9 Indicates the current time and date.

2 Select a programme using ←/↑/↓/→, and press ENTER.

You can also select a programme using the red button.

If you press → after selecting the last programme on the right, the schedule for the next 30 minutes is displayed (depending on availability from the broadcaster).

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Select a programme using ←/↑/↓/→, and press ENTER. - 1

Hint

You can display the channel list by pressing the ENTER button while watching a programme. To watch another channel, select a channel using /// , and press ENTER.

Available buttons in the programme list

Buttons Operations

PAGE +/- Display the previous/next eight channels.
INFO Display the detailed information of the programme (page 49).
RETURN Close the display.

To search for programmes by date

1 Press the green button while the programme list is displayed.
2 Select a date in the "Date" row.
3 Select a time in the "Time" row.
4 Select “Jump,” and press ENTER. The programme list for the specified date and time is displayed.

To search programmes by genre

1 Press the yellow button while the programme list is displayed.
2 Select a date in the "Date" row.
3 Select a time in the "Time" row.
4 Select the “Genre” row, and press ENTER. The genre list is displayed.
5 Select a genre using /// , and press ENTER.
6 Select "OK," and press ENTER.
7 Select “Search,” and press ENTER. The programme list for the specified genre is displayed.

Programme Information

The programme information display provides a quick and easy way to:

  • View descriptions of the programmes being broadcast now and next on the current channel.
  • View descriptions of the programmes being broadcast now and next on the other channels.

INFO ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

Displaying the programme information

1 Select a channel.
2 Press INFO.

The Information display appears showing a description of the current programme on view.

0002 NCE Thu,10,Aug 10:08> Now Live from Prague 10:00-11:00 Next NCE News 11:00-11:30

Available buttons in the Information display

Buttons Operations

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Buttons Operations - 1

Toggle the display between

description of the current/ next programme

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Buttons Operations - 2

Display programme

information for other channels

ENTER View the selected channel

INFO Display the detailed

programme information

Viewing a Digital Text Service

Many digital TV channels broadcast information via their text service. This digital service includes high-quality digital text and graphics along with advanced navigation options. Additionally, this recorder has access to dedicated text channels transmitted by the broadcasters.

Note

The appearance, content and navigation methods of all digital text services are decided by the broadcaster.

Number buttons PROG +/- EXIT/ RETURN ENTER

Selecting digital text from dedicated digital teletext channels

1 Select a dedicated channel that is broadcasting digital text.

You can search for a dedicated digital text channel using the “Electronic Programme Guide” (page 48).

The text page is displayed.

2 Once the text page is displayed (this may take some time), follow the on-screen instructions to obtain your required selection.

On some pages the TV programme may also be displayed on the text screen. On-screen instructions will inform you how to change the displayed programme. If you are instructed to press “OK” or “Select” when viewing the text pages, press ENTER.

To exit the text service

Follow the on-screen instructions, or press PROG +/-.

Selecting digital text from other channels

Digital text services may also be available on other digital channels. This is sometimes indicated by a small symbol on your TV screen, superimposed on the programme you are watching.

1 Select a channel.
2 Press (text) or the button indicated on screen by the broadcaster.

The text information appears.

3 Access required information using /// , the colour buttons and/or the number buttons.

If you are instructed to press "OK" or "Select" when viewing the text pages, press ENTER.

To exit the text service

Follow the on-screen instructions, or press

SONY RDR-HXD770 - To exit the text service - 1

(text) or EXIT/○ RETURN.

Timer Recording

(For Freeview users only)

Before Recording

Before you start recording...

  • Check that the disc has enough available space for the recording (page 40). For the HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you can free up disc space by erasing titles (page 92).
  • Adjust the recording picture quality if necessary (page 59).

Notes

  • To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment, finalise the disc (page 45).
  • If digital teletext is operated while recording, its contents will be recorded on the disc.
  • If the subtitles are displayed while recording, they will be recorded on the disc.

Recording mode

Like the standard ×3 recording modes of video tapes, you can select the desired recording mode using the REC MODE button.

Recording modes with higher quality provide a more beautiful recording, but the large data volume also results in a shorter recording time.

Conversely, a longer duration provides a longer recording time, but the lower data volume results in a coarser picture quality.

Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the recording modes.

To select further options for recording mode (manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording” setup (page 141). To record pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On (go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For details about manual recording mode, see page 141.

For timer recording, you can also select “AUTO” as recording mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to HDD).

Recording modeApprox. recording time (hours)
HDD DVD^*1
RDR-HXD770RDR-HXD870RDR-HXD970RDR-HXD1070
HQ (High quality)25 3453 1051 hr.1 min.
HSP ↑37 5079 1551 hr.30 min.
SP(Standard mode)51 68105 2102
LSP ↓63 84130 2652 hr.30 min.
ESP ↓75 100155 3153
LP ↓100 135210 4204
EP ↓150 200315 6356
SLP ↓200 270425 8508
SEP^*2 (Long duration)255 340530106010

*1 The approximate recording time is for 12 cm DVD discs.

The approximate recording times for DVD+R DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs are as follows:

HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes

HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes

SP: 3 hours 35 minutes

LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes

ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes

LP: 7 hours 11 minutes

EP: 10 hours 46 minutes

SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes

SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes

*2 When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP.

Hint

To easily select a manual recording mode, press REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and select a manual recording mode using / .

Notes

  • The maximum continuous recording time to the HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer than 12 hours is divided.
  • Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with the recording time.

  • Recording a programme with poor reception, or a programme or video source of low picture quality.
    – Recording on a disc that has already been edited.

  • Recording only a still picture or just sound.

- Programmes are recorded in the following aspect ratio.

- In the original aspect ratio, when recording to the HDD (when "HDD Recording Format" is set to "Video Mode Off" in the "Recording" setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode).

- In 4:3 when recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.

- When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode), the title is divided when the layer switches.

Unrecordable pictures

Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded on this recorder.

Copy control signalsRecordable discs
Copy-FreeHDD+RW-RWVR
-RWVideo+R-RVR
-RVideo
Copy-OnceHDD
-RWVR(CPRM*)
-RVR(CPRM*)

Copy-Never None

* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM compatible equipment (page 10).

Timer Recording (Standard/EPG)

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can set the timer for a total of 32 programmes, up to 30 days in advance. There are three methods to set the timer: the standard method, EPG method and Series Recording method.

  • Standard: Set the date, time, and programme position of the programme manually.
  • EPG: Set a programme to be recorded based on the information provided by the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) (page 55).
  • Series Recording: Automatically sets the recorder to record programmes in a series (page 57).

Setting the timer manually (Standard)

TIMER ENTER ■ REC STOP

1 Press TIMER.

The "Timer List" display appears.

Timer List 10:30 SUN 25/11 VPS/PDC 0/8 Counts 0/92 New Input FDTN _______________________________

2 Select the "New Input" row, and press ENTER.

Timer 10:30 SUN 25/11 Pr/CH Date Start Stop Extend AAB SUN 25/11 20:30 - - - - Off Detailed Settings Record to HDD Recording Mode SP VPS/PDC ...... Update ...... Genre No Category EPS Link ...... Series Recording ...... OK Set Details Set Title Name Cancel VPS/PDC 0/6

3 Select an item using / and adjust using / . Then press ENTER.

The adjustable items are listed below. "Pr/CH": Sets the programme position and the source.

“Date”: Sets the date (up to 30 days later). Select a recording pattern by pressing ↑ repeatedly to set the timer for the same daily or weekly programmes.

"Start": Sets the start time.

"Stop": Sets the stop time.

“Extend”: Sets duration when a timer recording is in progress. If the programme set to be recorded daily or weekly is extended, the manually extended time set here will be added to the subsequent timer recording times. Note that when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On,” you cannot make the “Extend” setting.

- If you want to make the detailed settings, select "Set Details" and press ENTER. Select an item using ↑/↓ and set using ←/→.

“Record to”: Sets the recording destination. If there is not enough available DVD disc space for the recording, the recorder automatically records the programme to the HDD even if you select “DVD” (Recovery Recording).

"Recording Mode": Sets the recording mode (page 52).

“VPS/PDC”: Sets the VPS/PDC function. See “About the VPS/PDC function (For analogue broadcasting only)” below.

"Update": Sets the recorder automatically replacing the previous timer recording with the new one.

“EPG Link” (page 58)

"Series Recording" (page 57)

- To enter a title name, select "Set Title Name" and press ENTER (page 42).

- If you make a mistake, select the item and change the setting.

4 Select "OK," and press ENTER.

The “Timer List” display (page 60) appears.

The timer recording indicator lights up on the front panel display and the recorder is ready to start recording.

Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts.

To stop recording during timer recording Press ■ REC STOP.

Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording.

On-screen instructions may appear after pressing ■ REC STOP. In this case, follow the on-screen instructions.

About the VPS/PDC function (For analogue broadcasting only)

VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV programmes in some broadcast systems.

These signals ensure that timer recordings are made regardless of any broadcast delays, early starts, or broadcast interruptions.

◆ To use the VPS/PDC function

Set "VPS/PDC" to "On" in step 3 above.

When you turn on this function, the recorder starts scanning the channels before the timer recording starts.

Rec. Mode Adjust

If there is not enough available disc space for the recording, the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec. Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording” setup (page 143).

If the timer settings overlap

The confirmation screen appears.

To store the setting, select "Yes."

To cancel the overlapped setting, select "No."

To confirm, change, or cancel a timer recording

See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings (Timer List)” on page 60.

Hints

  • You can also display the Timer display by selecting “Timer Recording” from the System Menu.
  • You can play the title as it is being recorded by selecting the programme title on the Title List (page 88).

Notes

  • If a message indicating that the HDD is full appears on the screen, change the recording destination to “DVD,” or make available space for the recording (page 92).
  • Check that the clock is correctly set before setting the timer recording. If not, the timer recording cannot be made.
  • To record a satellite programme, turn on the satellite tuner and select the satellite programme you want to record. Leave the satellite tuner turned on until the recorder finishes recording.
  • Even if the timer is set for the same daily or weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be made if it overlaps with a programme that has priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the priority order of the settings (page 60).

- Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be made while recording a programme that has priority.

- The beginning of some recordings may not be made when using the VPS/PDC function.

- You cannot extend the recording duration time when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”

- The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works with a timer recording and the VPS/PDC function set to off. It does not function with Quick Timer.

- The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO” when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”

Recording TV programmes using the EPG

The EPG function is a feature that simplifies setting the timer. Just select the programme you want to record in the EPG display. The date, time, and channel of that programme are set automatically.

Red button GUIDE ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER PAGE - PAGE + ■ REC STOP

1 Press GUIDE.

Guide (Digital) Thu.10.Aug 10:08 D001 DDE NEWS 15 10:00-11:30 DDE News News Thu.10.Aug 10:00 10:30 11:00 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News DDE News NCE Live from Prague NCE News AAC Opening... Foreign Markets-Morning... NDE 1 Hobbies and Interests John's... EFF News EFF News Channel J Weather Family Drive in... HGF City Houses Terms J9 No Information available. Timer Jump Search

2 Select a programme using ←/↑/↓/→.

To know more about the navigation options in the EPG application, see page 48.

3 Press the red button.

The date, start and stop times, programme position, recording mode, etc., settings appear.

Timer 10:30 SUN 25/11 Pn/CH Date Start Stop Extend AAB SUN 25/11 20:30 21:30 Off Detailed Settings Record to HDD Recording Mode SP VPS/PDC ...... Update ...... Genre No Category EPS Link On Series Recording ...... OK Set Details Set Title Name Cancel VPS/PDC 0/8

- If you want to change the setting, press / to select the item and press / to change the setting (page 54). "EPG Link" (page 58) "Series Recording" (page 57)

4 Select "OK," and press ENTER.

- In case of a current TV/radio/data broadcast timer setting, your recorder will immediately start recording.

D001 DDE NEWS 15 10:00-11:30 DDE News News Thu,10-Aug 10:00 10:30 11:00 DDE NEWS 16 DOE News DDE News NCE Live from Prague NCE News AAC Opening... Foreign Markets-Morning... NCE 1 Hobbies and Interests John's... EFF News EFF News Channel J Weather Family Drive it... HGF City House Terrie .29 No information available. Timer Jump Search

Your recorder will automatically begin recording when the programme starts. To modify the timer setting, see page 60.

◆ Some examples of timer event icon types are:

(d) (red): Indicates that the whole programme is set to be recorded. (e) (grey): Indicates that the programme is set to be recorded using Series Recording (page 57).

To scroll the EPG display by page (Page mode)

Press PAGE +/- while the EPG display is turned on to display the previous/next eight channels.

To stop recording during timer recording Press ■ REC STOP.

Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording.

On-screen instructions may appear after pressing ■ REC STOP. In this case, follow the on-screen instructions.

If the timer settings overlap

See page 55.

See page 54.

See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings (Timer List)” (page 60).

Hint

The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function also works with this timer method (page 55).

Note

The EPG programme start and end time are determined by the broadcaster.

Recording programmes using Series Recording

Series Recording is a feature which uses information from the Electronic Programme Guide.

Notes

  • This function cannot be used when the broadcaster does not include series information with the programme data.
  • Whether or not a programme is in a series is determined by the broadcaster.

Red button TIMER EXIT/ RETURN ● REC ■ REC STOP GUIDE ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

Series Recording

Automatically record programmes in a series.

1 Press GUIDE.

Guide (Digital) Thu,10,Aug 10:08 D001 DDE NEWS 15 10:00-11:30 DDE News News Thu,10,Aug 10:00 10:30 11:00 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News DOE News NCE Line from Prague NCE News AAC Opening... Foreign Markets-Morning... NCE 1 Histies and Interests Johri, EFF News EFF News ETF News Channel 2 Weather Family Drive it... HCP City House Terms J9 No Information available. Timer Amp Search

2 Select a programme using ←/↑/↓/→.
3 Press the red button.

The date, start and stop times, programme position, recording mode, etc., settings appear.

Timer 10:30 SUN 25/11 Pr/CH Date Start Stop Extend AAB SUN 25/11 20:30 21:30 Off OK Detailed Settings Record to HDD Recording Mode SP VPS/PDC .......... Update .......... Genre No Category EPG Link On Series Recording Off Set Details Set Title Name Cancel VPS/PDC 0/8

4 Select "Set Details," and press ENTER.
5 Set "Series Recording" to "On," and press ⬇ RETURN.
6 Select "OK," and press ENTER.

The selected programme is set for recording and appears in the Timer List (page 60). The other programmes in the series will be set for recording (appear in the Timer List) as each previous recording is completed.

For example, if there are three programmes in a series, the second programme will be set for recording only after the first recording is finished. The third programme will be set for recording only after the second recording is finished.

You can search for link programmes using "Series Search" (page 58).

Automatically update the date, start and stop times settings when changing the Electronic Programme Guide.

Set “EPG Link” to “On” in step 5 of “Series Recording” on page 57.

◆ Recording Split Programmes

Movies and other programmes that are split into 2 or more parts are called Split Programmes. If you set the timer for one part of a Split Programme, the other parts are automatically recorded. For example, if the first half is set to be recorded, the last half will be recorded automatically.

1 Press TIMER.
2 Select the timer setting, and press →.
3 When the following options appear in the sub-menu, select an option, and press ENTER.

“Alternate Search”: Searches for repeat programmes. The repeat programmes are displayed in the EPG.

“Series Search”: Searches for programmes in a series. The programmes in the series are displayed in the EPG.

“Recommendation Search”: Searches for programmes recommended by broadcaster as a link for current series. The recommended programmes are displayed in the EPG.

To set the programme for recording, follow the instructions for “Recording TV programmes using the EPG” (page 55) from step 2.

Notes

  • Only the earliest part of the Split Programme is displayed on the Timer List.
  • Any next Split Programme part that starts 3 or more hours later cannot be recorded automatically.
  • This recorder is featured with an EPG timer auto extend functionality that allows EPG timer recordings to be made in case of an early start (before the scheduled start time) or late finish (after the scheduled end time).
  • When “EPG Link” is set to “On,” you cannot change the date, start and stop time settings.

Using the Quick Timer function

You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute increments.

Press ● REC repeatedly to set the duration.

Each press advances the time in 30-minute increments. The maximum duration is six hours.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Press ● REC repeatedly to set the duration. - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["0:30"] --> B["1:00"] --> C["5:30"]
    C --> D["(normal recording)"]
    D --> E["6:00"]

The time counter decreases minute by minute to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the power turns off).

To cancel the Quick Timer

Press ● REC repeatedly until the counter appears in the front panel display. The recorder returns to normal recording mode. To stop recording, press ■ REC STOP.

Note

If you turn off the recorder during recording, recording is stopped.

Adjusting the recording picture quality

You can adjust the picture quality of digitally broadcasts programmes by selecting a preset setting. You can also adjust the picture quality by changing detailed settings, and store up to three settings in the memory.

Note

Only progressive video signals for recording can be adjusted.

SYSTEM MENU ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER DISPLAY

1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode. The System Menu appears.
2 Select "Picture Adjustment," and press ENTER.
3 Select a preset setting, and press ENTER.

"Tuner": TV broadcasts

"VCR": Video cassettes

"DTV": Digital broadcasts

"Memory1"/"Memory2"/"Memory3":

Your own settings. To create your own settings, see “To create your own setting” on page 59.

To check the detailed settings for the selected preset, press DISPLAY.

4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

To create your own setting

1 Select "Memory1," "Memory2," or "Memory3" in step 3.
2 Select "Detailed Settings," and press ENTER.

The display for adjusting detailed settings appears.

3 Select an item using ↑/↓, and adjust settings using ←/→.

For details about each setting, see the explanation of the display.

“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive video signal when “Component Video Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).

Select “Motion” for a picture, including subjects that move dynamically.

Select “Still” for a picture with little movement.

“Cinema”: Converts the progressive video signal to match the type of DVD software that you are watching when “Component Video Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).

Select "Auto" to detect the software type (Film-based or Video-based)

automatically and select the appropriate conversion mode. Normally select this position.

Select "Off" to fix the conversion mode to the mode for Video-based software.

4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

The setting is automatically stored as the setting you selected in step 1.

Creating chapters in a title

The recorder can automatically divide a recording (a title) into chapters by inserting chapter marks. To select chapter mark intervals or disable this function, see “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter (Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” in the “Recording” setup (page 143).

When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can edit chapter marks (page 95).

Checking/Changing/ Cancelling Timer Settings (Timer List)

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can check, change, or cancel the timer settings using the Timer List.

Note

You cannot change the timer settings with "EPG Link" set to "On."

TIMER ENTER

1 Press TIMER.

The "Timer List" display appears.

Timer List 10:30 SUN 25/11 VPS/PDC 0/8 Counts 4/32 MON - SAT 22:00 - 22:15 AAB DK SUN 25/11 20:30 - 21:30 DEF Overlap SUN 25/11 21:00 - 22:00 GHI Overlap MON 26/11 16:00 - 17:00 DEF DK New Input

Timer information displays the recording date, time, recording mode, etc.

When all of the timer settings do not fit on the list, the scroll bar appears.

To view the hidden timer settings, press

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Press TIMER. - 2

2 Select the timer setting you want to check/change/cancel, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

3 Select an option, and press ENTER.

"Modify":

Changes the timer setting.

Select an item using ←/→ and adjust using ↑/↓. Select "OK" and press ENTER.

Timer 10:30 SUN 25/11 Pr/CH Date Start Stop Extend AAR SUN 25/11 20:30 - 21:30 Off Detailed Settings Record to HDD Recording Mode SP VPS/POC Update Genre No Category EPG Link Off Series Recording Set Details Set Title Name Cancel VPS/POC 0/8

"Erase":

Erases the timer setting.

Select "Yes" and press ENTER.

"Skip Once":

Cancels the daily or weekly recordings only once. After cancelling the timer setting, "Skip Once" appears next to the timer setting in the Timer List.

"Alternate Search" (page 58)

"Series Search" (page 58)

"Recommendation Search" (page 58)

To change or cancel the setting, repeat steps 2 and 3 above.

When the timer settings overlap

- The programme that starts first has priority and the entire programme is recorded.

- After finishing the previous recording, the other recording starts with several tens-of-second's delay (when the end-time of one recording and the start-time of another are the same).

- When the recordings start at the same time, only one of them will be recorded. Cancel the timer setting for the programme that you are not going to record.

Hints

- For manual timer settings, you cannot modify the timer setting for the current recording, but you can extend the duration of the recording time while recording (page 56).

For timer settings using the EPG, you can modify the timer setting for the current recording while recording, and extend the duration of the recording (only when “EPG Link” is set to “Off”).

- You can move to the first row/bottom row of the Timer List using ◀◀◀/▶▶ while the list is displayed.

Notes

  • When “VPS/PDC” is set to “On” for one or more timer recordings, the start times may change in the event of a broadcast delay or early start.
  • Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be made while recording a programme that has priority.
  • Even if the timer is set for the same daily or weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be made if it overlaps with a programme that has priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the priority order of the settings.

Recording from Connected Equipment

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can record from a connected VCR or similar device. To connect a VCR or similar device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar Device” on page 31. Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack).

HDD DVD INPUT REC REC MODE STOP

1 Press HDD or DVD.

If you select DVD, insert a recordable DVD (see “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36).

2 Press INPUT to select an input source according to the connection you made.

The front panel display changes as follows:

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Press INPUT to select an input source according to the connection you made. - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["programme position"] --> B["L1"]
    B --> C["L2"]

3 Select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode).

Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and “Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).

4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode.

For details about the recording mode, see page 52.

5 Insert the source tape into the connected equipment and set to playback pause.

6 Press ● REC.

This recorder starts recording.

7 Press the pause (or play) button on the connected equipment to cancel the playback pause status.

The connected equipment starts playback and the playback image is recorded by this recorder.

To stop recording, press ■ REC STOP on this recorder.

If you connect a digital video camera with a DV IN jack

See “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 104 for an explanation of how to record from the DV IN jack.

Hint

You can adjust the settings for the recording picture before recording. See “Adjusting the recording picture quality” on page 59.

Notes

  • When recording a video game image, the screen may not be clear.
  • Any programme that contains a Copy-Never copy guard signal cannot be recorded.
  • When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or “B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound when playing in the following cases.
  • When recording in PCM mode.
  • When recording to the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the “Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
  • You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137).

Introduction to the GUIDE Plus+ System

The GUIDE Plus+ ^® system is a free interactive programme guide. It displays up to seven days of programme listings, including programme titles, promotions, and broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data for the television programme listings are carried by your local broadcast host channel and are received through your aerial, set top box receiver, or direct cable connection from the wall.

Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list of all European host channels.

These are just a few of the ways to use the GUIDE Plus+ system.

  • Search for programmes by listing them according to category (such as Movies or Sport) or by using the Keyword Search function (page 66).
  • Once you have found the programme you are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set the timer for recording (page 73).
  • You can set the system to display your favourite programmes according to conditions that you set, such as category and keyword (page 67).

For more information, see “Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus+ System” (page 65).

Learning the common elements

Press GUIDE.

The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen” appears.

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Record Channels Home Friends: The one with the Male Nanny: A jealous Ross makes Rachel's choice of an over-sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phonbs must choose between two unexpected... BBC2 [P02] 10:00(120Min) Grid Search My TV Schedule Tue.25 10:00 10:30 Last Channel Friends ONE Fimbles Starship ITO Friends Itv1 This... Alias This... 4 Sally Jessy Raph... Our b... Go five Armageddon avylond News at Ten The Secret Itv2 Football Emmerdale Homes... Polic... 7

1 Video Window: This shows the programme you were watching when you pressed GUIDE.
2 Action Bar: When the same colour button on the remote is pressed, the Action Bar functions. The Action Bar function differs according to the screen.
3 Information Box: Shows information about the selected programme when the “Home Screen” is displayed. Contents will differ according to the displayed screen.
4Menu Bar: Press the blue button ("Home"), and press ↑ to move the cursor to the Menu Bar. Then select one of the following features using ←/→, and press ENTER.

“Grid”: Shows the programmes for the current time slot and next 7 days.

“Search”: Allows you to search for titles by category or by keyword (page 66). The displayed category depends upon the programme data received by this recorder. Movies, Sport, and Children are examples of possible categories.

"My TV": Sets the profile for your favourite programmes (page 67).

“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer settings (page 77).

“Info”: Shows information when available.

“Editor”: Allows you to edit the channel lineup and channel display (page 69).

“Setup”: Allows you to change the language, country/region, postal code, input source, or host channel.

⑤ “Home” position: When you press the blue button (“Home”), the cursor returns to the last programme position on the “Grid.”
6 Tiles: Shows the programme titles and category; green (sports), purple (movies), blue (children's), teal (others).
7 Broadcast station Logo: Shows the broadcast station logo.
⑧ Time Slot: Indicates the currently selected time slot. Use ←/→ to select a different time slot.

Hint

You can also move the cursor to the Menu Bar by pressing MENU.

Troubleshooting guide

If you are having trouble displaying the television programme list, please check the following:

  • The clock must be set correctly. If the clock is not set, set it manually (page 129).
  • This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus+ data several times a day when the recorder is turned off (standby mode). Turn off the recorder when you are not using it (for example, at night). After initial setup (page 26), it may take up to 24 hours for your recorder to start receiving programme listings. It may take up to one day to receive all seven days of TV programme listings.

- Check the following if the programme guide data has not been received after waiting for a day:

  • “Easy Setup” (page 26) is completed.
  • The host channel is not disabled (see “Disabling programme positions” on page 70).

- The timer is not set.

If the programme guide data still cannot be received after checking the above, search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually (page 69):

www.europe.guideplus.com

  • If the host channel has changed or moved, the programme guide data cannot be received. In this case, follow the steps in “Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host channel” (page 68) to update the host channel setting.
  • If the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only, do the following:

– Turn on your set top box receiver.
- Connect the set top box controller.
– Follow the steps in “Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host channel manually” (page 69) to set the host channel manually. Be sure to set your set top box receiver (tuner) as the source.

Notes

  • Your set top box receiver's programme position may suddenly change even if the recorder is turned off. This is because the set top box controller has changed the programme position to receive the GUIDE Plus+ data.
  • When you reset the recorder (page 158) the following GUIDE Plus+ system settings are reset:

– Country/region setting in “Easy Setup”
- “Country” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the Menu Bar
- “Postal Code” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the Menu Bar

Note that the GUIDE Plus+ system is also reset when you make changes to the host channel settings.

- The GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used when “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC” in the “Basic” setup (page 130).

Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus+ System

Colour buttons GUIDE ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER PAGE - DAY - PAGE + DAY +

1 Press GUIDE.

The GUIDE Plus+ system "Home Screen" appears.

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 ▲ Record Channels Home Friends: The one with the Male Nanny: A jealous Pass mocks Rachte's choice of an over-sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phorbe must choose between two unexpected... BBC2 [P02] 10:00(120Min) Grid Search My TV Schedule Tue.25 10:00 10:30 Last Channel Friends ONE Flimbles Starship TWG Friends It v 1 This... Alias This... 4 Sally Jessy Raph... Our b... Go five Armageddon acroned News at Ten The Secret It v 2 Football Emmerdale Homes... Polk...

2 Select a programme using ←/↑/↓/→, and press ENTER.

The GUIDE Plus+ system disappears and the programme position changes to the selected programme.

1 Press GUIDE.

The GUIDE Plus+ system "Home Screen" appears.

2 Press the yellow button ("Channels").

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Cancel Home Press ↑ ↓, ←, or → to select a channel Press ENTER to return to the 'Grid' at this channel position. BBC1 [P 01] Select a channel: Promotional Panel 76 W0 IT VU 4 ⑤ ayllone it v2

3 Select the TV broadcast station logo using /// , and press ENTER. The display returns to "Grid" and the programme currently being broadcast by the selected TV station is selected.

4 Select a programme using / , and press ENTER.

To return to the "Home" position

Press the blue button ("Home").

The cursor returns to the home position on the "Grid."

To set a programme for timer recording

See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+ (in the UK only))” (page 73).

To close the GUIDE Plus+ system

Press GUIDE.

Hints

- Press the PAGE +/- buttons to change the programme list by page.

- Press the DAY +/- buttons to change the programme list by day.

To unlock the Video Window

The Video Window is locked so that it does not change programme positions when you move the cursor across other titles.

From “Grid,” select the logo of the programme position that is locked, and press the red button (“Unlock”). “changes to

"and the Video Window is unlocked. To lock the Video Window, select the logo of the programme position you want to lock and press the red button ("Lock").

Notes

- The Video Window is locked during recording and the lock indicator appears in the Video Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window while recording.

- If you are watching programmes through a set top box receiver, the Video Window may not change as fast as you move the cursor. In this case, lock the Video Window (page 66).

Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+ System

Colour buttons ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

1 Select "Search" in the Menu Bar, and press ENTER.

Pr 2 26-May 10:10 Home Press ENTER to search for Movies / Highlights. Press ↑ or ↓ for other sub-categories. Press ← to search the My Choice category. Press → to search the Sport category. Grid Search My TV Schedule My Choice Movies Sport Highlights All Action Animation Comedy Drama Romance Sci Fi Thriller Promotional Panel

2 Select a category using ←/→.

To search for a programme by keyword, select "My Choice." You can search for all programmes that contain the keyword in the programme's title and in the programme's Information Box. If no keywords are displayed, enter the keyword. See "To enter a new keyword" below.

3 Select a sub-category using / , and press ENTER.

Programmes that meet the conditions are listed.

The sub-categories differ according to country/region.

4 Select a programme using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

To enter a new keyword

1 Select "Search" in the Menu Bar, and press ENTER.
2 Select "My Choice" using / .
3 Press the yellow button ("Add"). The display for entering characters appears.

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Back Save Keyboard Home Press →, ←, ↓ or ↑ to highlight a character on the keyboard, then press ENTER to select. Press the yellow button to see special characters. Press the green button to save. Please enter a keyword: A A A Promotional Panel A B C D E F 1 2 3 G H I J K L 4 5 6 M N O P Q R 7 8 9 S T U V W X 0 + - Y Z . : . ; * / = * ' ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ % < >

4 Select a character on the keyboard using /// , and press ENTER.

To switch between upper-case, lower-case, or characters with accents, press the yellow button (“Keyboard”) repeatedly. To cancel entering a new keyword, press the red button (“Back”).

5 Repeat step 4 to enter the keyword.
6 Press the green button (“Save”). The entered keyword is registered. To delete the keyword, select the keyword you want to delete, and press the red button (“Delete”). To change the keyword, select the keyword you want to change, and press the green button (“Edit”).

To set a programme for timer recording

See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+ (in the UK only))” (page 73).

Hint

When two or more keywords are set for "My Choice," you can select "All" for sub-category.

Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information (My TV)

You can set a profile and list up only your favourite programme information.

Colour buttons ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

Setting a profile

1 Select "My TV" in the Menu Bar, and press the yellow button ("Profile").

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Use this screen to enter channels, categories and keywords for your profile. Press ↑ or ↓ to select, then press the yellow button to define your profile settings. Profile Settings: Promotional Panel Channels Categories Keywords Press ENTER to activate your Profile.

2 Select "Channels," "Categories," or "Keywords," and press the yellow button ("Add").

“Channels”: Select the programme position using /// , and press ENTER. To add more programme positions, press the yellow button (“Add”). You can register up to 16 programme positions.

To cancel the registration, select a programme position, and press the red button (“Delete”).

“Categories”: Select the category using /// , and press ENTER. To add more categories, press the yellow button (“Add”). You can register up to 4 categories.

To cancel the registration, select a category, and press the red button (“Delete”).

"Keywords": Enter a keyword. See "To enter a new keyword" on page 67. To add more keywords, press the yellow button ("Add"). You can register up to 16 keywords.

To cancel the registration, select a keyword, and press the red button (“Delete”).

3 Press ENTER.

To change the profile settings

Repeat from step 1 above.

Selecting and watching a programme from My TV

1 Select "My TV" in the Menu Bar, and press ENTER.

The programmes that match the profile conditions are displayed.

2 Select a programme using ←/↑/↓/→, and press ENTER.

To set a programme for timer recording

See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+ (in the UK only))” (page 73).

Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus+ System

Number buttons Colour buttons ENTER

Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host channel

The default host channel setting is set to “Automatic,” so you should not have to change the host channel setting. However, if the host channel has changed or moved, update the host channel setting.

If the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only (page 17), see “Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host channel manually” on page 69.

1 Select "Setup" in the Menu Bar.
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.
2 Select "Host Channel Setup" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
3 Press the yellow button ("Reset").
4 Press I/⏻ to turn off the recorder.

5 Wait for one day until the programme guide data can be received.

If the programme guide data has not been received after waiting for a day, search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually (“Changing the GUIDE Plus+host channel manually” (page 69)). www.europe.guideplus.com

Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host channel manually

If the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only and you want to receive the programme guide data from your set top box receiver, search for the host channel on the following website and set it for your area, following the steps below: www.europe.guideplus.com

1 Select "Setup" in the Menu Bar.

The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.

2 Select "Host Channel Setup" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

3 Press the yellow button ("Change") twice.

"Manual" appears.

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 ▲ Back Save Change Home Press the green button to save your entries. Press the yellow button to switch between automatic and manual. Press → to edit Source and Programme Number. Host Channel Setup Source Prag No. Manual Tuner -- Promotional Panel In order to receive TV listing data you must enter the correct Source and Programme Number of a GUIDE Plus + Host Channel. Promotional Panel It may take up to 24 hours to receive complete TV listings data.

4 Select "Source" using →.
5 Press the yellow button ("Source") repeatedly to select the input source.
6 Select "Prog. No." using →.
7 Enter the programme position number using the number buttons.
8 Press the green button ("Save"). The display asks for confirmation.

9 Select "Confirm" using / , and press ENTER.

The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu.

10 Wait one day until the programme guide data can be received.

To cancel the settings

Press the red button ("Back").

To return to the "Home" position

Press the blue button ("Home").

The cursor returns to the home position on the "Grid."

To check the GUIDE Plus+ system information

1 Select "Setup" in the Menu Bar, and press ENTER.
2 Select "GUIDE Plus+ system Information" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

Checking programme positions

Check whether programme position numbers are the same as the programme position numbers set in the “Analog Tuner” setup. If you want to make adjustments to the channel settings or change the channel name, see “Aerial Reception Settings (Analog Tuner)” (page 133).

1 Select "Editor" in the Menu Bar.

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Home 'Editor' displays your channel settings. You may turn a channel On (blue) or Off (grey) and identify its Source and Programme Number. Press ↓ to use. Press ← to view Info'. Press ↔ to view 'Setup'. My TV Schedule Info Editor Name On/Off Source Preg. No. BBC1 On A. TV 01 BBC2 On A. TV 02 ITV Off A. TV 04 ITV On A. TV 05 CH4 On A. TV 07 CH5 On A. TV 09 BBC3 On A. TV 10 BBC4 Off A. TV 11 ITV2 On A. TV 12

2 Press ENTER.
3 Press → to move the cursor to the right column.

4 Select the programme position you want to check using ↑/↓.

To change the input source, press the red button (“Source”).

To change the programme position, press the green button (“Prog. No.”), then enter a programme position number using the number buttons, and press ENTER.

Note

To receive from the recorder a programme position that can be received by either the set top box receiver or the recorder, change the input source in step 4.

Disabling programme positions

If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels, you can hide them.

1 Select "Editor" in the Menu Bar, and press ENTER.
2 In the left column, select the programme position you want to hide or display using ↑/↓.
3 Press the red button ("On/Off").

The disabled positions will turn grey. To show the disabled positions, press the red button (“On/Off”) again.

Notes

  • You cannot record a programme position if it is not set in “Aerial Reception Settings (Analog Tuner)” (page 133) even if it is set to “On” in the “Editor” in the Menu Bar.
  • If you are using your set top box receiver to receive programmes (when the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only, page 17) and are able to receive the same programme with both the set top box receiver and the recorder, change the “Source” to receive the programme with the recorder’s tuner.

Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only)

Before Recording

Before you start recording...

  • Check that the disc has enough available space for the recording (page 40). For the HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you can free up disc space by erasing titles (page 92).
  • Adjust the recording picture quality if necessary (page 76).

Note

To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment, finalise the disc (page 45).

Recording mode

Like the standard ×3 recording modes of video tapes, you can select the desired recording mode using the REC MODE button.

Recording modes with higher quality provide a more beautiful recording, but the large data volume also results in a shorter recording time.

Conversely, a longer duration provides a longer recording time, but the lower data volume results in a coarser picture quality.

Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the recording modes.

To select further options for recording mode (manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording” setup (page 141). To record pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On (go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For details about manual recording mode, see page 141.

For timer recording, you can also select “AUTO” as recording mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to HDD).

Recording modeApprox. recording time (hours)
HDDDVD*1
RDR-HXD770RDR-HXD870RDR-HXD970RDR-HXD1070
HQ (High quality)25 34 53 105 1 hr.1 min.
HSP ↑ 37 50 79 155 1 hr.30 min.
SP(Standard mode)51 68 105 210 2
LSP ↓ 63 84 130 265 2 hr.30 min.
ESP ↓ 75 100 155 315 3
LP ↓ 100 135 210 420 4
EP ↓ 150 200 315 635 6
SLP ↓ 200 270 425 850 8
SEP*2(Long duration)255 340 530 1060 10

^*1 The approximate recording time is for 12 cm DVD discs.

The approximate recording times for DVD+R DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs are as follows:

HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes

HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes

SP: 3 hours 35 minutes

LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes

ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes

LP: 7 hours 11 minutes

EP: 10 hours 46 minutes

SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes

SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes

*2 When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP.

Hint

To easily select a manual recording mode, press REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and select a manual recording mode using / .

Notes

  • The maximum continuous recording time to the HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer than 12 hours is divided.
  • Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with the recording time.

– Recording a programme with poor reception, or a programme or video source of low picture quality.
– Recording on a disc that has already been edited.
– Recording only a still picture or just sound.

- Programmes are recorded in the following aspect ratio.

- In the original aspect ratio, when recording to the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode).

– In 4:3 when recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.

- When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode), the title is divided when the layer switches.

Recording stereo and bilingual programmes

The recorder automatically receives and records stereo and bilingual programmes based on the ZWEITON system or the NICAM system.

The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode Off” in the

“Recording” setup (page 144)) and a DVD-RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) can record both main and sub sounds. You can switch between main and sub when playing the disc.

The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the “Recording” setup (page 144)) and a DVD+RW, DVD+R, DVD-RW (Video mode), or DVD-R (Video mode) can record only one sound track (main or sub) at a time. Select the sound track in the “Audio In” setup before recording starts. Set “Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” (default) or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).

About HDD Recording format, see page 144.

ZWEITON (German stereo) system

When a stereo-based programme is received, "Stereo" appears.

When a bilingual ZWEITON-based programme is received, “L,” “R,” or “L+R” appears.

NICAM system

To record a NICAM programme, be sure to set “NICAM Select” to “NICAM” (default) in the “Audio In” setup. If the sound is not clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts, set “NICAM Select” to “Standard” (page 137).

Hint

You can select the audio (main or sub) while recording bilingual programmes using the AUDIO button. This does not affect the recorded sound.

Unrecordable pictures

Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded on this recorder.

Copy control signalsRecordable discs
Copy-FreeHDD+RW-RWVR
-RWVideo+R-RVR
-RVideo
Copy-OnceHDD
-RWVR(CPRM*)
-RVR(CPRM*)

Copy-Never None
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM compatible equipment (page 10).

Timer Recording (GUIDE Plus+/Manual)

HDD

+RW

-RWVR

-RWVideo

+R

-RVR

- RVideo

There are two methods to set the timer within the GUIDE Plus+ system: One Button Recording and setting the timer manually. You can set the timer for a total of 32 programmes (8 programmes when using the VPS/PDC function), up to 30 days in advance.

Notes

  • When the recorder is connected to a set top box receiver and you want to record using the GUIDE Plus+ system, turn on the set top box receiver and connect the set top box controller.
  • Do not operate your set top box receiver just before or during a timer recording. This may prevent the accurate recording of a programme.

One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+ (in the UK only))

You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set the timer to record a programme up to seven days in advance.

Colour buttons GUIDE ←/↑/↓/→ ● REC ■ REC STOP

1 Press GUIDE.

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Record Channels Home Friends: The one with the Male Nanny: A jealous Ross mocks Rachel's choice of an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phohe must choose between two unexpected... BBC2 [P02] 10:00(120Min) Grid Search My TV Schedule Iue.25 10:00 10:30 Last Channel Friends Jenny White Fimbles Starship Wet Two Friends It v 1 This... Alias This... 4 Sally Jessy Raph... Our It... Go five Armageddon Keylons News at Ten The Secret It v 2 Football Emmerdale Homes... Polic...

2 Select a programme using ←/↑/↓/→.

To search for a programme by category or by keyword, select "Search" in the Menu Bar. See "Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+ System" on page 66 for more information about searching for a programme. You can select a programme from "My TV" (page 67).

3 Press the red button ("Record") or ● REC.

The set programme and Time Slot change colour and the recorder is ready to start recording. When recording from a set top box receiver, be sure to turn it on. Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts.

• To record on a DVD See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings” on page 77.
- To make more detailed timer settings See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings” on page 77.

To confirm, change, or cancel a timer recording

See "Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings" on page 77.

To stop recording during timer recording

Press ■ REC STOP.

Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording.

On-screen instructions may appear after pressing ■ REC STOP. In this case, follow the on-screen instructions.

Rec. Mode Adjust

If there is not enough available disc space for the recording, the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec. Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording” setup (page 143).

If the timer settings overlap

If one or more timer settings overlap, a message appears. To change the timer settings, see “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings” on page 77.

Hint

If you are recording to the HDD, you can play the title as it is being recorded by selecting the programme title on the Title List (page 88).

Notes

  • If a message indicating that the HDD is full appears on the screen, change the recording destination to “DVD,” or make available space for the recording (page 92).
  • If there is not enough available DVD disc space for the recording, the recorder automatically records the programme to the HDD even if you select “DVD” (Recovery Recording).
  • The last recording mode you selected manually becomes the default recording mode for timer recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system.
  • You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or DVD) once the recording starts.
  • The beginning of some recordings may not be made when using the VPS/PDC function.
  • You cannot extend the recording duration time when “VPS/PDC” is selected (page 78).
  • The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works with a timer recording to DVD, and the VPS/PDC function set to off.
  • The recording mode cannot be set to "AUTO" when "VPS/PDC" is set to "On."

Setting the timer manually

Number buttons Colour buttons GUIDE ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER ● REC ■ REC STOP

1 Press GUIDE.
2 Select "Schedule" in the Menu bar. The SCHEDULE list appears.

3 Press the green button ("Manual").

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Back Next Home Please enter the recording date and press the green button to confirm. Grid Search My TV Schedule No programmes SP Once HDD Promotional Panel HDD Remain 106h 9m (SP) DVD Remain 0h 59m (SP)

4 Set the date using the number buttons and /// . Then press the green button ("Next").

5 Set the start time using the number buttons and /// . Then press the green button ("Next").

6 Set the stop time using the number buttons and /// . Then press the green button ("Next").

7 Select the input source using ↑/↓, and select the programme position using the number buttons or ↑/↓.

You can also select the programme position using the yellow button (“Channels”).

8 Press the green button ("Next").

The display for entering characters appears.

To change the title name, select a character on the keyboard using ←/↑/↓/→, and press ENTER.

To switch between upper-case, lower-case, or characters with accents, press the yellow button (“Keyboard”).

9 Press the green button ("Save").

The date, start and stop times, programme position, etc. settings appear. The recorder is ready to start recording.

To confirm, change, or cancel a timer recording

See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings” on page 77.

To stop recording during timer recording

Press ■ REC STOP.

Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording.

On-screen instructions may appear after pressing ■ REC STOP. In this case, follow the on-screen instructions.

Rec. Mode Adjust

If there is not enough available disc space for the recording, the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec. Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording” setup (page 143).

Using the Quick Timer function

You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute increments.

Press ● REC repeatedly to set the duration.

Each press advances the time in 30-minute increments. The maximum duration is six hours.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Press ● REC repeatedly to set the duration. - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["0:30"] --> B["1:00"]
    B --> C["5:30"]
    C --> D["(normal recording)"]
    D --> E["6:00"]

The time counter decreases minute by minute to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the power turns off).

To cancel the Quick Timer

Press ● REC repeatedly until the counter appears in the front panel display. The recorder returns to normal recording mode. To stop recording, press ■ REC STOP.

Note

If you turn off the recorder during recording, recording is stopped.

Adjusting the recording picture quality

You can adjust the picture quality by selecting a preset setting. You can also adjust the picture quality by changing detailed settings, and store up to three settings in the memory.

SYSTEM MENU ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER DISPLAY

1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select "Picture Adjustment," and press ENTER.
3 Select a preset setting, and press ENTER.

"Tuner": TV broadcasts

"VCR": Video cassettes

“DTV”: Digital broadcasts

"Memory1"/"Memory2"/"Memory3":

Your own settings. To create your own settings, see “To create your own setting” on page 76.

To check the detailed settings for the selected preset, press DISPLAY.

4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

To create your own setting

1 Select "Memory1," "Memory2," or "Memory3" in step 3.
2 Select "Detailed Settings," and press ENTER.

The display for adjusting detailed settings appears.

3 Select an item using ↑/↓, and adjust settings using ←/→.

For details about each setting, see the explanation of the display.

“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive video signal when “Component Video Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136). Select “Motion” for a picture, including subjects that move dynamically.

Select “Still” for a picture with little movement.

“Cinema”: Converts the progressive video signal to match the type of DVD software that you are watching when “Component Video Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).

Select “Auto” to detect the software type (Film-based or Video-based)

automatically and select the appropriate conversion mode. Normally select this position.

Select "Off" to fix the conversion mode to the mode for Video-based software.

“3-D Y/C”: Adjusts the brightness/colour separation for the video signals. Select “Motion” for a picture, including subjects that move dynamically.

Select “Still” for a picture with little movement.

“YNR” (luminance noise reduction): Reduces noise contained in the luminance element of the video signal.

“CNR” (chroma noise reduction): Reduces noise contained in the chroma element of the video signal.

“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of images outlines.

“White AGC”: Turn on for automatic white level adjustment.

“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity of white.

"Black Enhancer": Adjusts the intensity of black.

"Black Level": Selects the black level (setup level) for the NTSC video signals. Select "ON" to raise the standard black level. Select this when the picture appears too dark.

Select "OFF" to set the black level of the input signals to the standard level.

Normally, select this position.

"Hue": Adjusts the colour balance.

“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours deeper or lighter.

4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

The setting is automatically stored as the setting you selected in step 1.

Creating chapters in a title

The recorder can automatically divide a recording (a title) into chapters by inserting chapter marks. To select chapter mark intervals or disable this function, see “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter (Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” in the “Recording” setup (page 143). When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can edit chapter marks (page 95).

Checking/Changing/ Cancelling Timer Settings

HDD +RW -RWvr -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can change or cancel timer settings using the SCHEDULE list.

Number buttons Colour buttons GUIDE ←/↑/↓/→

Changing timer settings

1 Press GUIDE.
2 Select "Schedule" in the Menu bar. The SCHEDULE list appears.

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 Manual Home 'Schedule' displays programmes you've Set to Record. Press ↓ to use. Press the green button for manual recording. Press ← to view 'My TV'. Press → to view Info'. Grid Search My TV Schedule Record Schedule Qual Freq. Dest. 25-May Friends SP Once HDD 25-May Travel SP Once HDD HDD Remain 63h 52m (SP) DVD Remain 1h 9m (SP)

3 Select the timer setting you want to change using ↑/↓, and press the green button (“Edit”).

Pr 2 25-May 10:10 ▲ Back Next Home Please enter the recording date and press the green button to confirm. 25 May Grid Search My TV Schedule Record Schedule Qual Freq. Dest. 25-May Friends SP Once HDD 25-May Travel SP Once HDD Promotional Panel HDD Remain 63h 52m (SP) DVD Remain 1h 9m (SP)

4 In the left column, select an item using the red button ("Back") or the green button ("Next"), and adjust using the number buttons or ←/↑/↓/→.

You can change the date, start time, stop time, programme position, or input source.

The cursor moves to the right column.

5 Press the corresponding colour button repeatedly to change settings.

  • Yellow button (“Destination”): Sets the recording destination. If there is not enough available DVD disc space for the recording, the recorder automatically records the programme to the HDD even if you select “DVD” (Recovery Recording). When you set a daily or weekly timer, “HDDr” allows you to replace the previous timer recording with the new one automatically (HDD only).
  • Green button (“Frequency”): Selects the recording pattern.
  • Red button ("Quality"): Selects the recording mode (page 71).

6 Press → to display "Timing."

7 Press the green button ("Timing") repeatedly to select the duration time or to set the VPS/PDC function.

See “About the VPS/PDC function” below.
- If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, press the yellow button (“Genre”) repeatedly.

Notes

  • The new settings become effective when you exit the GUIDE Plus+ system.
  • When you set the recording destination to "HDDr," the previous timer recording will be replaced with the new one even if you have not watched it.

About the VPS/PDC function

VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV programmes in some broadcast systems. These signals ensure that timer recordings are made regardless of any broadcast delays, early starts, or broadcast interruptions.

◆ To use the VPS/PDC function

Select "VPS / PDC" in step 7 above.

When you turn on this function, the recorder starts scanning the channels before the timer recording starts.

Cancelling timer settings

1 Press GUIDE.
2 Select "Schedule" in the Menu bar. The SCHEDULE list appears.
3 Select the timer setting you want to cancel using ↑/↓, and press the red button ("Delete").

To close the SCHEDULE list

Press GUIDE.

When the timer settings overlap

  • The programme that starts first has priority and the entire programme is recorded.
  • After finishing the previous recording, the other recording starts with several tens-of-second's delay (when the end-time of one recording and the start-time of another are the same).
  • When the recordings start at the same time, only one of them will be recorded. Cancel the timer setting for the programme that you are not going to record.

Note

When “VPS / PDC” is set for one or more timer recordings, the start times may change in the event of a broadcast delay or early start.

Recording from Connected Equipment

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can record from a connected VCR or similar device. To connect a VCR or similar device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar Device” on page 31. Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack).

HDD DVD INPUT REC REC MODE STOP

1 Press HDD or DVD.

If you select DVD, insert a recordable DVD (see “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36).

2 Press INPUT to select an input source according to the connection you made.

The front panel display changes as follows:

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Press INPUT to select an input source according to the connection you made. - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["programme position"] --> B["L1"]
    B --> C["L2"]

3 Select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode).

Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and “Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).

4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode.

For details about the recording mode, see page 71.

5 Insert the source tape into the connected equipment and set to playback pause.

6 Press ● REC.

This recorder starts recording.

7 Press the pause (or play) button on the connected equipment to cancel the playback pause status.

The connected equipment starts playback and the playback image is recorded by this recorder.

To stop recording, press ■ REC STOP on this recorder.

If you connect a digital video camera with a DV IN jack

See “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 104 for an explanation of how to record from the DV IN jack.

Hint

You can adjust the settings for the recording picture before recording. See “Adjusting the recording picture quality” on page 76.

Notes

  • When recording a video game image, the screen may not be clear.
  • Any programme that contains a Copy-Never copy guard signal cannot be recorded.
  • When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or “B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound when playing in the following cases.
  • When recording in PCM mode.
  • When recording to the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the “Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).

- You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137).

Playback

Playing the Recorded Programme/DVD

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD * DATA CD *

* DivX video file only

HDD Number buttons AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE SYSTEM MENU DVD CLEAR MENU TITLE LIST/ TOP MENU ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER DISPLAY PLAY MODE

1 Press HDD or DVD.

  • If you select DVD, insert a disc (see "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36).
  • If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, DATA DVD or DATA CD, press ▷. Playback starts.

2 Press TITLE LIST.

For details about the Title List, see “3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List)” on page 38. Example: HDD

Title List (HDD) 10 Titles 4 Titles By Date All Genres 10 NEW 13:00 FRI 20/04 Pr 4 SLP 13:00 Fn 20/04 Pr 4 SLP 0h30m( 0.4G) 9 NOW 21:00 TUE 10/04 Pr 9 SLP 21:00 Tue 10/04 Pr 9 SLP 0h30m( 0.4G) 8 9:00 MON 02/04 Pr 3 SLP Mystery 1h00m( 0.8G) 7 20:00 FRI 30/03 Pr 5 SLP World Sports 1h00m( 0.8G) HDD SP Remain 70h03m

3 Select a title using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

Playback starts from the selected title.

To use the DVD's Menu

When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalised DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode), you can display the disc's menu by pressing TOP MENU or MENU.

Note

The ▷ button is not available in the disc's menu.

To play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs with PBC functions

PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs interactively using the menu on your TV screen.

When you start playing a VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the menu appears.

Select an item using the number buttons, and press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions in the menu (press ▷ when “Press SELECT” appears).

Note

Some playback options such as search, repeat play or programme play cannot be played with PBC function. To play with playback options, start playback without PBC functions using the Title List.

To change the angles

If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the disc, “appears on the screen. Press ANGLE during playback. To switch the angle mark indicator to off, set “Angle Indicator” to “Off” in the “Playback” setup (page 145).

To stop playback

Press ■.

To playback quickly with sound (Scan Audio)

When you press ▶ during playback, you can play quickly with dialogue or sound (except for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs).

No sound is output when you press ▶▶ two or more times to change search speed.

To display the registration code for this recorder

Select “Registration Code” of “DivX” in the “Options” setup (page 150).

To resume playback from the point where you stopped (Resume Play)

When you press ▷ again after you stop playback, the recorder resumes playback from the point where you pressed ■.

To start from the beginning, press ■ again, and press ▷. Playback starts from the beginning of the title/track/scene.

The point where you stopped playing is cleared when:

  • you open the disc tray (except HDD).
    – you play another title (except HDD).
  • you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode only).
    – you edit the title after stopping playback.
    – you change the settings on the recorder.
  • you make a recording (except HDD/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode).
  • you disconnect the mains lead.

Notes

  • You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.
  • Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO CDs.

To play restricted DVDs (Parental Lock)

If you play a restricted DVD, the display for entering your password appears on your TV screen.

Enter your four-digit password using the number buttons, and press ENTER.

The recorder starts playback.

To register or change the password, see “Limitation Settings (Parental Lock)” on page 145.

To lock the recorder (Child Lock)

You can lock all of the buttons on the recorder so that the settings are not cancelled by mistake.

When the recorder is turned off, hold down ■ on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in the front panel display. The recorder does not work except for timer recordings while the Child Lock is set.

To unlock the recorder, hold down ■ on the recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the front panel display.

One-Touch Play (for SCART/HDMI connections only)

Press ▷. With one touch of the ▷ button, the recorder and your TV automatically turn on and the TV's input is switched to the recorder. Playback starts automatically.

Hint

You can also use the ▷ button in step 3 (page 80) to start playback.

Note

When using the HDMI connection, there may be a delay, before the playback picture appears on the TV screen, and the beginning portion of the playback picture may not be displayed.

Playback options

To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 80.

ButtonsOperations
AUDIO HDD -RWVR -RVR DVD VCD DATA DVD * DATA CD ** DivX video file onlySelects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed repeatedly in normal playback mode.DVD DATA DVD *DATA CD *: Selects the language.HDD -RWVR -RVR : Selects the main or sub sound.VCD: Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.
SUBTITLE DVD DATA DVD *DATA CD ** DivX video file onlySelects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly.
←•/•(instant replay/ instant advance)Each time you press ↔replays the scene for the following duration.5 seconds → 15 seconds → 30 seconds → 1 minute →2 minutes → 3 minutes → 5 minutes → 10 minutes →20 minutes → advances the time in 10-minute increments →2 hoursEach time you press •briefly fast forwards the current scene for the following duration.30 seconds → 1 minute → 1 minute 30 seconds → 2 minutes →3 minutes → 5 minutes → 10 minutes → 20 minutes → advances the time in 10-minute increments → 2 h o u r s
|◀◀ (previous)/▶▶l (next)Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scenc/track when pressed during playback.Goes to the beginning of the first title/track when pressed in stop mode.
◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀▶◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀◀<|txt_contd_src|> (fast reverse/fast forward)Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback.Search speed changes as follows:fast reverse fast forward ◀◀◀FR1*1 ← → ▶▶FF1 *2 ◀◀◀FR2 ← ← → → ▶▶FF2 ◀◀◀FR3*3 ← ← ← → → → ▶▶FF3*3 ◀◀◀FR4*3 ← ← ← ← → → → → ▶▶FF4*3When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button.*1 When you press ◀◀◀once during playback, you can play Reverse play (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/DivX video files).*2 When you press ▶▶once during playback, you can play quickly with sound (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs).*3 Not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs.To resume normal playback, press ▷.
(slow, freeze frame)Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in pause mode. Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode. To resume normal playback, press ▷.
HDD +RW -RWVR-RW Video +R -RVR-RVideo DVD VCD *1DATA DVD *1*2 DATA CD *1*2 *1Playback direction only *2 DivX video file only
II (pause) Pauses playback.To resume normal playback, press ▷.

Notes

  • Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles recorded on this recorder.
  • JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder can only be played as a slideshow. For video files containing JPEG image files and movies, the recorder can play movie parts only.

Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track

DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack. When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set "DTS Output" to "On" in the "Audio Out" setup (page 139).

Playing a specific portion repeatedly (A-B Repeat)

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. The "Play Mode" menu appears.

2 Select "A-B Repeat," and press ENTER.

“Set point A” is selected.

Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Set point A Set point B Off

3 While monitoring the sound, press ENTER at the starting point (point A) of the portion to be played repeatedly.

"Set point B" is selected.

4 Continue playing to locate the ending point (point B), and press ENTER.

A-B Repeat starts.

To cancel A-B Repeat

Press CLEAR. Or, set "A-B Repeat" to "Off" in the "Play Mode" menu.

Hint

You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the System Menu.

Note

When playing an HDD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD-R (Video mode), set the start and stop points within the same title.

Playing repeatedly (Repeat)

You can play repeatedly all the titles/tracks/files or a single title/chapter/track on the HDD or a disc.

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. The "Play Mode" menu appears.

2 Select "Repeat," and press ENTER.

3 Select an item to be repeated using ↑/↓.

“Repeat Title” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA DVDs ^1 /DATA CDs ^1 ): repeats the current title.

"Repeat Chapter" (for HDD/DVDs): repeats the current chapter.

“Repeat Track” (for VIDEO CDs ^*2 ): repeats the current track.

“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current programme (page 85).

“Repeat Disc” (for VIDEO CDs ^*2 /DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)): repeats all of the tracks on a disc.

^*1 DivX video file only

^*2 Available only when playing without PBC functions

4 Press ENTER.

Repeat play starts.

To cancel Repeat play

Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.

Hint

You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the System Menu.

Note

You cannot select "Repeat Programme" when no programme remains.

Creating your own programme (Programme)

HDD -RW Video * -R Video * VCD

* finalised disc only

You can play the contents of the HDD or a disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the titles/chapters/albums/tracks on the HDD or disc to create your own programme. You can make a programme of up to 24 steps.

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The "Play Mode" menu appears.
2 Select "Programme," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Input/Edit Programme," and press ENTER.

The “Input/Edit Programme” display differs depending upon the disc type. Example: DVD

Programme Step 01, 001-01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Current Title (001-014) Title 001 Title 002 Title 003 Title 004 Title 005 Title 006 Title 007 Title 008 Chapter (01-02) Chapter 01 Chapter 02

4 Select a title or album (example: Title 001) using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
5 Select a chapter or track (example: Chapter 01) using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The chapter or track is programmed. If you make a mistake, select the step number (example: 01.) using // , and press CLEAR.

6 To programme other chapters or tracks, press ←/↑/↓/→ to select a step number, and repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 Press ▷.

Programme play starts.

To cancel Programme play

Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.

To erase the programme

Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in the “Play Mode” menu.

Hints

  • The program you made remains after Programme play finishes. To play the same program again, set “Programme” to “Start Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu. However, the programme is cleared after you remove the disc or press ⏻/➊.
  • You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu (page 84).
  • You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode” in the System Menu.

Adjusting the picture quality

HDD +RW -RWVR -RW Video +R -RVR - RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *

DATA CD *

* DivX video file only

You can adjust the picture quality from connected equipment, such as a TV or projector by selecting a preset setting. You can also adjust the picture quality by changing detailed settings, and store up to three settings in the memory.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU during playback or in pause mode.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select "Picture Adjustment," and press ENTER.
3 Select a preset setting using ←/→, and press ENTER.

Dynamic: produces a bold dynamic picture by increasing the picture contrast and the colour intensity.

Standard: displays a standard picture.

Professional: displays an original picture.

Memory1/Memory2/Memory3: Your own settings. To create your own settings, see “To create your own setting” below.

To check the detailed settings for the selected preset, press DISPLAY.

4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

To create your own setting

1 Select "Memory1," "Memory2," or "Memory3" in step 3.
2 Select "Detailed Settings," and press ENTER.

The display for adjusting detailed settings appears.

Memory1 Prog. Motion Motion Still Cinema (Auto1) YNR Off Max BNR Off Max MNR Off Max Sharpness Soft Inteled Fine Detail Soft Fine

3 Select an item using ↑/↓, and adjust settings using ←/→.

For details about each setting, see the explanation of the display.

“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive video signal when “Component Video Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).

Select “Motion” for a picture, including subjects that move dynamically.

Select “Still” for a picture with little movement.

“Cinema”: Converts the progressive video signal to match the type of DVD software that you are watching when “Component Video Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).

Select “Auto1” to automatically detect the software type (Film-based or Video-based) and select the appropriate conversion mode. Normally select this position.

If the picture appears unnatural, select "Auto2," "On," or "Off."

“YNR” (luminance noise reduction): Reduces noise contained in the luminance element of the video signal.

“BNR” (block noise reduction): Reduces “block noise” or mosaic-like patterns in the picture.

“MNR” (mosquito noise reduction):

Reduces the faint noise appearing around the outlines of the images. The noise reduction effects are automatically adjusted within each setting range according to the video bit rate and other factors.

“Sharpness”: Sharpens the outlines of the images.

“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of images outlines.

“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity of white.

"Black Enhancer": Adjusts the intensity of black.

"Black Level": Selects the black level (setup level) for the video signals.

Select “ON” to raise the standard black level. Select this when the picture appears too dark.

Select “OFF” to set the black level of the input signals to the standard level.

Normally, select this position.

“Gamma Correction”: Adjusts how dark areas look.

“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance.

“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours deeper or lighter.

4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.

The setting is automatically stored as the setting you selected in step 1.

Notes

  • If the outlines of the images on your screen become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to “Off.”
  • Depending on the disc or the scene being played, the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to discern. Also, these functions may not work with some screen sizes.
  • The following settings are not available for the signals output from the HDMI jack.
  • "Sharpness"
  • “White Enhancer”
  • "Black Enhancer"
  • “Black Level”
  • “Gamma Correction”
    -“Hue”
    -“Chroma Level”

Pausing a TV Broadcast (TV Pause/Pause Live TV)

HDD

You can pause a current TV broadcast, and record it on the HDD, then continue watching the programme at a later time. This is useful when you receive an unexpected phone call or visitor while watching TV.

When connecting the recorder to your TV using the SCART jack, do the followings.

  • set “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder Only” in the “Options” setup (page 150).
  • set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the “Options 2” setup (page 150).
  • preset programme positions by downloading from your TV using "Download from TV" of "Auto Channel Setting" in the "Analog Tuner" setup (page 133).

If you do not make the SCART connection, set “TV Pause” to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the “Options 2” setup (page 150).

TV PAUSE ■ REC STOP

1 While viewing a TV broadcast, press TV PAUSE.

The picture pauses, and the recorder starts recording the current TV channel to the HDD.

It may take up to 10 seconds to start recording.

2 Press ▷ to resume watching the programme.

You can fast forward/fast reverse, pause, or stop the programme using ◀◀/▶▶,

■ and ■ without affecting the recording.

3 Press ■ REC STOP to stop recording.

Notes

- The picture does not pause and the recorder starts only recording in the following cases.

  • when the programme positions are preset differently between the recorder and the connected TV.
  • when watching the programme from the external equipment connected to your TV.

  • The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when “TV Pause” is set to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the “Options 2” setup (page 150).

  • You may not be able to use the “TV Pause” function depending on some TVs. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV.
  • The “TV Pause” function will not work correctly when watching TV via the connected component such as a VCR or digital tuner. The “TV Pause” function works only with the channel selected on the TV.
  • You cannot use the “TV Pause” function as a recording feature from the component (VCR, etc.) connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack.
  • The “TV Pause” function will not work if the connected TV does not comply with SMARTLINK. To check whether your TV complies with SMARTLINK, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV.

Playing from the Beginning of the Programme You Are Recording (Chase Play)

HDD

“Chase Play” allows you to view the recorded part of a programme on the HDD while the recording is being made. You do not need to wait until the recording finishes.

Diagram of a remote control with labeled buttons and a play button, showing various function keys and numeric keypad.

Press ▷ while recording.

Playback starts from the beginning of the programme you are recording.

When you fast forward to the point that you are recording, "Chase Play" returns to normal playback.

Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another (Simultaneous Rec and Play)

HDD +RW -RWVR -RW Video +R -RVR - RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD DATA CD

“Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to view a previously recorded programme while recording programmes. Playback continues even if a timer recording starts. Use this function as follows:

  • While recording to the HDD: Play another title on the HDD. Play a previously recorded programme on a DVD by pressing the DVD button.
  • While recording to a DVD: Play a previously recorded programme on the HDD by pressing the HDD button.

You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, Super VIDEO CD, DATA DVD, or DATA CD while recording on the HDD.

HDD DVD TITLE LIST ↑/↓, ENTER

Example: Play another title on the HDD while recording to the HDD.

1 While recording, press TITLE LIST to display the HDD Title List.
2 Select the title you want to play, and press ENTER. Playback starts from the selected title.

Example: Play a DVD while recording to the HDD.

1 While recording, press DVD and insert the DVD into the recorder.
2 Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD Title List.
3 Select the title you want to play, and press ENTER. Playback starts from the selected title.

Note

You cannot play a DVD, DivX video or VIDEO CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while recording on the HDD in the PAL/SECAM colour system.

Searching for a Time/Title/Chapter/Track, etc.

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR - RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD * DATA CD *

* DivX video file only

You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene or track. As titles and tracks are assigned individual numbers, select the title or track by entering its number. You can also search for a scene using the time code.

Number buttons ENTER PLAY MODE

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. The "Play Mode" menu appears.
2 Select "Search Mode," and press ENTER.
3 Select a search method, and press ENTER.

“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA DVDs ^1 /DATA CDs ^1 /VIDEO CDs ^*2 ): Searches for a starting point by entering the time code.

"Title Search" (for HDD/DVDs/DATA DVDs ^1 /DATA CDs ^1 )

"Chapter Search" (for HDD/DVDs) "Track Search" (for VIDEO CDs ^*3 )

*1 DivX video file only
*2 Except Super VIDEO CDs
^*3 Available only when playing without PBC functions

The display for entering the number appears.

Example: Chapter Search

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Searching for a Time/Title/Chapter/Track, etc. - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Play Mode"] --> B["Search Mode"]
    B --> C["A-8 Repeat"]
    B --> D["Repeat"]
    B --> E["Programme"]
    A --> F["Time Search"]
    F --> G["Title Search"]
    G --> H["Chapter Search"]
    H --> I["Input Chapter Number"]
    I --> J["2"]

4 Press the number buttons to select the number of the title, chapter, time code, etc., you want.

For example: Time Search

To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”

If you make a mistake, select another number.

5 Press ENTER.

The recorder starts playback from the selected number.

Before Editing

This recorder offers various edit options for various disc types.

Notes

  • You may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.
  • DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot be edited on this recorder.
  • If a message appears and indicates that the disc's control information is full, erase or edit unnecessary titles.
  • The remaining disc space displayed on the screen may differ from the actual remaining disc space.
  • When editing a DVD+R or DVD-R, finish all editing before finalising the disc. You cannot edit a finalised disc.
Edit featuresHDD+RW-RWVR
-RWVideo-RVR
+ROriginal titlePlaylist title
-RVideo
Title edit Erase (page 92) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Title Name (page 92) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Set Thumbnail (page 92) Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-B Erase (page 93) Yes No Yes Yes
Divide (page 94) Yes No No Yes
Set Genre (page 92) Yes NoNo No
Protect (page 92)YesYesYesNo
Move (page 97)No NoNo Yes
Combine (page 97)No NoNo Yes
Genre Name (page 92)Yes NoNoNo
Editing multiple titles (Multi-Mode) (page 93)YesNo No No
Creating a Playlist (page 96)NoNoNoYes
Undo (page 92) NoYes Yes Yes
Chapter editDivide (page 95)YesNo Yes Yes
Erase (page 96) Yes NoYes Yes
Move (page 97)No NoNo Yes
Combine (page 96)YesNoYes Yes

To open up disc space

To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with the largest number in the title list.

Largest title number Title List (HDD) 10 Titles 4 Titles By Date All Genres 10 NEW 13:00 FRI 20/04 Pr 4 SLP 13:00 Fri 20/04 Pr 4 SLP 0h30m( 0,4G) 9 NEW 21:00 TUE 10/04 Pr 9 SLP 21:00 Tue 10/04 Pr 9 SLP 0h30m( 0,4G) 8 9:00 MON 02/04 Pr 3 SLP Mystery 1h00m( 0,8G) 7 20:00 FRI 30/03 Pr 5 SLP World Sports 1h00m( 0,8G) HDD SP Remain 70h08m

To open up disc space on the HDD or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can erase any title. See “Erasing and Editing a Title” on page 92. For DVD-Rs and DVD+Rs, the available disc space does not increase even if you erase titles.

To switch between the Playlist and Original Title List (DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode only)

You can display the Playlist titles in the Title List (Playlist), or the Original titles in the Title List (Original).

1 Press ← while the Title List is displayed.
2 Select "Play List" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
3 Select "Original" or "Play List" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

About editing accuracy

When editing the titles recorded on the HDD, you can select the type of editing.

"Video Mode Compatible Editing": Recommended if you are going to dub the titles to DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode) or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs afterward by High-speed dubbing. The editing points and chapter marks may be slightly different from those you selected.

"Frame Accurate Editing": Recommended when you want to edit titles precisely. However, the editing points may be slightly different from the point you selected when you dub the titles by High-speed dubbing.

Erasing and Editing a Title

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

This section explains the basic edit functions. Note that editing is irreversible. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) without changing the original recordings, create a Playlist title (page 96).

TITLE LIST ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER EXIT/ RETURN

1 Press TITLE LIST.

For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode, switch the Title List (Original or Playlist), if necessary.

2 Select a title, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

3 Select an option, and press ENTER.

You can make the following edits to the title.

"Erase": Erases the selected title. Select "Yes" when asked for confirmation.

"Edit": Allows you to make the following edits.

- “Title Name”: Allows you to enter or re-enter a title name (page 42).

- “Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s thumbnail picture that appears in the Title List (page 39).

  • “A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the title (page 93).
  • “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles (page 94).
  • “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters in a title (page 95).
  • “Set Genre”: Assigns a genre to a title.
  • “Protect”: Protects the title. “☐” appears next to the protected title.
  • “Move”: Changes the title’s playing order (page 97).
  • “Combine”: Combines two titles into one (page 97).
    “Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a genre name (up to 12 characters) (page 42).
    "Multi-Mode": Allows you to select and edit multiple titles at one time (page 93).
    "Create": Creates a Playlist (page 96).
    "Undo": Undoes the last edit you made.

Hint

You can label or re-label DVDs (page 43).

Editing multiple titles (Multi-Mode)

HDD

You can select and edit up to 24 titles at one time.

1 Press TITLE LIST.

2 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

3 Select "Multi-Mode," and press ENTER.

The display for selecting titles to be edited appears.

Title List (HDD) ✓ Multi-Mode 10 Titles 4 Titles By Date All Genres 10 NEW 13:00 FRI 20/04 Pr 4 SLP 13:00 Fri 20/04 Pr 4 SLP Oh30m(0,4G) 9 NEW 21:00 TUE 10/04 Pr 9 SLP 21:00 Tue 10/04 Pr 9 SLP Oh30m(0,4G) 5 9:00 MON 02/04 Pr 3 SLP Mystery 1h00m(0,8G) 7 20:00 FRI 30/03 Pr 5 SLP World Sports 1h00m(0,8G) HDD SP Remain 70h03m

4 Select a title, and press ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box. To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.

5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles you want to edit.

6 When you finish selecting titles, press →.

The sub-menu appears.

7 Select an option, and press ENTER.

"Erase": Erases the selected titles.

"Protect": Protects the titles. " 🔒 appears next to the protected title.

"Unprotected": Unprotects the titles.

"Change Genre": Changes the genre of the titles.

Hint

You can exit "Multi-Mode" by pressing → and selecting "Single-Mode" while selecting titles.

Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase)

HDD

-RWVR

-RVR

You can select a section (scene) in a title and erase it. Note that erasing scenes in a title cannot be undone.

1 After step 2 of "Erasing and Editing a Title," select "Edit," and press ENTER.

2 Select "A-B Erase," and press ENTER.

For the HDD, select a type of editing, and press ENTER. For details, see page 92. The display for setting point A appears. The title starts to play.

A-B Erase (HDD) World Sports Rec. time 1h00m 7-1 0.10.00 ►Play From To Exit

3 Select point A using ◀◀/▶▶, and press Ⅱ.

- To return to the beginning of the title, press II and then press I .

4 Select "From," and press ENTER.

The position of point A is displayed, and the title re-starts playing.

5 Select point B using ◀◀/▶▶, and press ▪.

6 Select "To," and press ENTER.

The position of point B is displayed.

7 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

The scene is erased.

To cancel "A-B Erase"

Press ⬇ RETURN. The Title List appears.

Hint

A chapter mark is inserted after the scene is erased. The chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters on either side of the mark.

Notes

  • Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the point where you erase a section of a title.
  • Sections shorter than five seconds may not be erased.

Dividing a title (Divide)

HDD -RWVR * -RVR *

If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do not want to reduce the picture quality, divide the title into two shorter titles. Note that dividing a title cannot be undone.

* Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode.

1 After step 2 of "Erasing and Editing a Title," select "Edit," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Divide," and press ENTER.

For the HDD, select a type of editing, and press ENTER. For details, see page 92.

The display for setting the dividing point appears.

The title starts to play.

Divide Title (HDD) World Sports Rec. time 1h90m 7-1 0,10,00 Play Divide Cancel

3 Select the dividing point using ◀◀/▶▶, and press ▪.

- To return to the beginning of the title, press || and then press ◀◀◀.

4 Press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

5 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

The title is divided into two.

Erasing and Editing a Chapter

HDD -RWVR -RVR

You can edit individual chapters within a title. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) without changing the original recordings, create a Playlist (page 96).

TITLE LIST ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

1 Press TITLE LIST.

For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode, switch the Title List (Original or Playlist), if necessary.

2 Select a title containing the chapter you want to edit, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

3 Select "Edit," and press ENTER.

4 Select "Chapter Edit," and press ENTER.

For the HDD, select a type of editing, and press ENTER. For details, see page 92.

5 Select an option, and press ENTER.

You can make the following edits to the chapter.

“Divide”: Divides a chapter into two (page 95).

"Erase/Move"

  • “Erase”: Erases the selected chapter (page 96).
  • “Move” (for Playlist titles on DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode): Changes the chapter’s playing order (page 97).

“Combine”: Combines two chapters into one (page 96).

Dividing a chapter (Divide)

1 After step 4 of "Erasing and Editing a Chapter," select "Divide."

Chapter Edit (HDD) World Sports Rec. time 1n00m Chapters $3 7-1 0,10,00 ► Play Ext DMte Frase Combine

2 Select a chapter using ←/→, and press ENTER.

The chapter starts to play.

3 Select the dividing point using ◀◀/▶▶, and press ▪.

- To return to the beginning of the chapter, press || and then press ◀◀.

4 Press ENTER.

The chapter is divided into two.

Erasing a chapter (Erase)

1 After step 4 of "Erasing and Editing a Chapter," select "Erase/Move."

Chapter Edit (HDO) World Sports Rec. Time 1h00m Chapter 0h20m Edit Divide Free Combine

2 Select a chapter using / , and press ENTER.
3 Select "Erase," and press ENTER. The display asks for confirmation.
4 Select "Yes," and press ENTER. The chapter is erased.

Combining multiple chapters (Combine)

1 After step 4 of "Erasing and Editing a Chapter," select "Combine."

Chapter Edit (HDO) World Sports Rec. time 1h00m Edit Divide Finish Combine

2 Move the combining bar using ←/→, and press ENTER.

The two adjacent chapters of the combining bar are combined.

Creating and Editing a Playlist

-RWVR -RVR

Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit without changing the actual recordings. You can create up to 99 Playlist titles.

Note

Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the "Copy-Once" copy protection signal cannot be dubbed or moved (page 99).

TITLE LIST ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

1 Press TITLE LIST.

Switch to the Playlist (page 92).

2 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

3 Select "Create," and press ENTER.

The original titles in the Title List appear.

4 Select an original title to add to the Playlist, and press ENTER.

The selected title is added to the Playlist.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of the titles you want to add to the Playlist.

Moving a Playlist title (Move)

1 Press TITLE LIST. Switch to the Playlist (page 92).
2 Select a Playlist title, and press →. The sub-menu appears.
3 Select "Edit," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Move," and press ENTER.

Title List (DVD) 2 Titles a Titles Play List 1 FRI 20/04 Tennis 2 TUE 10/04 Travel DVD VR Mode Remain 1h03m Tennis 11.96 0h15m

5 Select a new location for the title using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The title moves to the new location. • To move more titles, repeat from step 2.

Combining multiple Playlist titles (Combine)

1 Press TITLE LIST. Switch to the Playlist (page 92).
2 Select a Playlist title, and press →. The sub-menu appears.
3 Select "Edit," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Combine," and press ENTER.

Title List (DVD) 2 Titles 8 Titles Play List 1 FRI 20/04 Tennis 2 TUE 10/04 Travel DVD VR Mode Remain 1h03m Tennis 11:36 0h15m

5 Select a title you want to combine.
6 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

The titles are combined.

Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)

You can divide a Playlist title. For instructions, see page 94.

Moving a chapter (Move)

1 Press TITLE LIST.

Switch to the Playlist (page 92).

2 Select a Playlist title containing the chapter you want to edit, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

3 Select "Edit," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Chapter Edit," and press ENTER.
5 Select "Erase/Move."

Chapter Edit (DVD VR made Play List) World Sports Rec, time 1n00m Chapter 0n20m Exit Divide Erase Move Contains

6 Select a chapter using / , and press ENTER.
7 Select "Move," and press ENTER.
8 Select a new location for the chapter using / , and press ENTER.

The chapter moves to the new location.

Dubbing (HDD ↔ DVD)

Before Dubbing

HDD+RW-RWVR-RWVideo+R
-RVR-RVideo

In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive (HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.” You can dub a playing title using the HDD/DVD DUB button (see “HDD/DVD Dubbing” on page 99) or you can select to dub multiple titles all at once (see “Dubbing Using Dubbing List” on page 100). You can also dub an entire DVD disc to make a backup copy (see “Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup)” on page 103).

Before you start, read the following precautions, which are common to all dubbing methods.

If you want to record from a digital video camera connected to the DV IN jack, see “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 104. To record from equipment connected to the LINE IN jacks, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 79.

Before you start...

  • You cannot record both the main and sub sound on the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the “Recording” setup), DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode). For bilingual programmes, set “Bilingual Recording” to either “A/L” (default) or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138). About HDD Recording format, see page 144.
  • A title name in the dubbing source is dubbed. However, only up to 40 characters of a title name are dubbed when dubbing from the HDD to a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode).

  • The chapter marks in the dubbing source are dubbed. The position of chapter marks may be slightly changed from the original. However, the chapter marks in the dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title when dubbing to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD+R at normal speed. The chapter marks are automatically inserted according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” and “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” settings in the “Recording” setup (page 143).

  • The “Set Thumbnail” setting in the dubbing source is dubbed as a thumbnail picture marker (except when dubbing from a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)). The position of thumbnail picture markers may be slightly changed from the original.

Hint

When you dub a Playlist title, it is recorded as an Original title.

Notes

  • You cannot make a recording while dubbing.
  • Before playing a dubbed disc on other DVD equipment, finalise the disc (page 45, 100).
  • You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs or finalised DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode) to the HDD.
  • Titles containing mixed aspect ratios cannot be dubbed to a DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode) using the HDD/DVD DUB button.
  • Titles over 8 hours cannot be dubbed to single-layer DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.
  • Low resolution (SEP through LP modes) 16:9 size titles cannot be dubbed to a DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
  • When dubbing to a DVD+R DL, DVD-R DL (Video mode) in Real-Time Dubbing mode, the dubbing contents are divided into titles.

Dubbing restriction

You cannot dub movies and other DVD VIDEOs to the HDD. Also, when dubbing from a DVD to the HDD, scenes that contain a copy protection signal cannot be recorded. Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy protection signals can be moved only from the HDD to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)* (after the title is moved, the original title in the HDD is erased). The “Move” function is performed using Dubbing List. Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy protection signals are indicated with COPY

Copy protection signalsDubbing
Copy-Free (No copy protection signal)SONY RDR-HXD770 - Dubbing restriction - 1
Copy-OnceHDD → -RWVR * -RVR *

* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) only. CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images.

Notes

  • Protected titles in the HDD cannot be moved.
  • The “Move” function is not available for HDD/DVD DUB dubbing.
  • Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy protection signal, the recording restrictions on that title are retained.

HDD/DVD Dubbing

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can dub a single title by pressing the HDD/DVD DUB button during playback.

1 Start playback of a title.

For playing a title, see “Playing the Recorded Programme/DVD” on page 80.

2 Press HDD/DVD DUB.

The recorder starts dubbing the current playing title from the beginning. The recorder turns off automatically when you do not use the recorder for more than 20 minutes after the dubbing has finished.

To cancel the dubbing

Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more than one second.

When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway, no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target. However, note that this will decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs.

About dubbing mode

Titles on the HDD are dubbed to a disc at high speed (High-speed dubbing). Titles on a disc are dubbed to the HDD at normal speed (Real-Time dubbing).

To convert the recording mode (only when dubbing from a disc to the HDD)

After step 1, press REC MODE to select the recording mode.

Note

You cannot use the HDD/DVD DUB button in the following cases. Dub the title using Dubbing List (page 100).

  • When dubbing the title recorded in MN6 mode or longer duration mode to a DVD+RW/DVD+R.
  • When dubbing the title recorded in HQ+ mode to a DVD.

Dubbing Using Dubbing List

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can select the titles you want to dub using Dubbing List. You can also edit titles before dubbing without changing the original titles.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

2 Select "Dubbing," and press ENTER.
3 Select a dubbing direction, and press ENTER.

To dub titles from the HDD to a disc, select "HDD -> DVD."

To dub titles from a disc to the HDD, select "DVD/CD -> HDD."

4 Select "Create New Dubbing List," and press ENTER.

The Dubbing List appears.

- If you have previously saved a Dubbing List and want to resume editing it, select "Use Previous Dubbing List," and go to step 7.

1 2 Dubbing HDD->OVID (Video mode) 4 Titles Select Titles 1 > 2 > 3 By Date All Genres 4 FRI 16/11 World Tour-Asia 3 Pr 4 3 SAI 10/11 World Tour-Asia 2 Pr 4 2 TUE 06/11 World Tour-Asia 1 Pr 4 1 THU01/11 World Cup Final Pr 3 Back Next 5 4 World Tour-Asia 3 15.00 0x10m(0.9G) Pr 4 Sports SP Dubbing List Total 0.0G Current DVD Remain 4.4G

1 Direction of dubbing
② Total number of titles to be dubbed
③ Dubbing step number

Display 1: Select a title you want to dub (the "Select Titles" display). Display 2: Edit a title (the "Title Edit" display).

Display 3: Confirm the settings and start dubbing (the "Start Dubbing" display).

4 Total size of the selected titles and available space on the disc to be dubbed (approximate)
5 Selected title's thumbnail picture

5 Select a title, and press ENTER.

The selected title changes colour.

When you select “HDD -> DVD” in step 3, you can change the title order or search for a title by genre (see “3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List)” on page 38).

6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles in the order you want to dub.
7 Select "Next" using →, and press ENTER.

The "Title Edit" display appears.

For details about editing, see "To edit titles on the Dubbing List" on page 102.

8 Select "Next" using →, and press ENTER.

The "Start Dubbing" display appears.

Dubbing HDD→DVD (Video mode) Start Dubbing 1 >2 >3 HDD → DVD-R Video Mode Dub. Time 0h 3m Recording Mode High-Speed Disc Name DISC01 Finalise Off Dubbing List Total 0.7G Current DVD Remain 4.4G Back Recording Mode Input Disc Name Finalise Start Dubbing

9 Select an option using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The options differ depending on the dubbing direction or disc type.

"Recording Mode": Changes the dubbing mode of all selected titles at a time using ↑/↓ (page 71).

"Input Disc Name": Changes the disc name (page 42).

"Finalise": Select "Yes" to finalise a disc automatically after dubbing (DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode), or DVD+R).

10 Select "Start Dubbing," and press ENTER.

When you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step 9, select the title menu style, and press ENTER.

The recorder turns off automatically when you do not use the recorder for more than 20 minutes after the dubbing has finished.

To cancel dubbing

Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more than one second.

When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway, no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target. However, note that this will decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs.

About dubbing mode

“●” appears next to the title that can be dubbed at high speed (High-speed dubbing) in the “Title Edit” display. The following titles are dubbed at normal speed (Real-Time dubbing).

  • Titles containing both main and sub sounds (except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)).
  • Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3 and 16:9, etc.) (except for DVD-RWs/ DVD-Rs (VR mode)).
  • Titles recorded on DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode).
  • 16:9 size titles recorded on DVD+RW/DVD+R.

The minimum required time is as follows (approximate).

Required times for High-speed Dubbing from HDD to DVD (for 60-minute programme) ^*1

Speed^*2 6x 2.4x 2x
Rec.modeHigh-speed DVD+RW/ DVD-RW/ DVD+R/ DVD-RDVD+R(Double Layer)DVD-R(Dual Layer)
HQ Approx.10 min.Approx.25 min.Approx.30 min.
HSP Approx.6 min.40 sec.Approx.16 min.40 sec.Approx.20 min.
SP Approx.5 min.Approx.12 min.30 sec.Approx.15 min.
LSP Approx.4 min.Approx.10 min.Approx.12 min.
ESP Approx.3 min.20 sec.Approx.8 min.20 sec.Approx.10 min.
LP Approx.2 min.30 sec.Approx.6 min.15 sec.Approx.7 min.30 sec.
EP Approx.1 min.40 sec. ^*3 Approx.60 min. ^*3 Approx.5 min.
SLP Approx.1 min.15 sec. ^*3 Approx.60 min. ^*3 Approx.3 min.45 sec.
SEP Approx.1 min. ^*3 Approx.60 min. ^*3 Approx.3 min. ^*3

*1 The values in the above table are for reference only. Actual times for dubbing also require time for creating disc's control information and other data.

*2 This is the maximum recording speed of this recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed the value indicated in the above table even when using discs that support higher recording speeds. In addition, depending on the disc condition, the recorder may be unable to record at the maximum recording speed indicated in the table.

^*3 High-speed dubbing is not available when dubbing titles recorded in SEP, SLP, or EP mode to DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.

To edit titles on the Dubbing List

1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Dubbing Using Dubbing List” on page 100. The “Title Edit” display appears.

Dubbing HDD→DVD (Video mode) 4 Titles Title Edit 1 >2 >3 1 World Tour-Asia 3 2 World Tour-Asia 2 3 World Tour-Asia 1 4 World Cup Final Back Next World Tour-Asia 3 Ch90m(0.9G) Dubbing List Total 3.4G Current DVD Remain 4.4G

2 Select a title you want to edit, and press ENTER. The sub-menu appears.

3 Select an option, and press ENTER. The options differ depending on the dubbing direction or disc type. “Erase”: Erases the selected title. “Title Name”: Names or renames a title (page 42). “A-B Erase”: Erases the section of the title (page 93). “Move”: Changes the order of titles (page 97). “Preview”: Allows you to check the content of a title. “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles (page 94). “Combine”: Combines two titles (page 97). “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters (page 95) “Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s thumbnail frame that appears in the Title List (page 39). “Recording Mode”: Sets the picture quality of the dubbing. “Bilingual”: Sets how a bilingual audio programme is dubbed. “Cancel”: Exits the sub-menu.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit all of the titles. 5 Go to step 8 of “Dubbing Using Dubbi List” on page 100 to dub edited title

Notes

- The Dubbing List you created remains after dubbing. To edit the existing Dubbing List, select "Use Previous Dubbing List" in step 4. The Dubbing List is cleared when: - you change "Input Line System" setting in the "Basic" setup (page 130). - you reset the recorder (page 158). - you open the disc tray (except when dubbing from the HDD). - you edit the titles on a disc (except when dubbing from the HDD). - you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist (when dubbing from DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode only). - you finalise the disc.

- The “seams” that are left over from editing may remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs (Video mode). - Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts, even if you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step 9.

Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup)

+RW

-RWVideo

+R

-RVideo

You can dub all of the contents on a finalised DVD+RW/DVD+R or finalised DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode) to another recordable DVD+RW/DVD-RW or unused DVD+R/DVD-R via the HDD as a backup copy.

Note

Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select "Dubbing," and press ENTER.
3 Select "DVD Backup," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Start new DVD Backup," and press ENTER.

- If you have previously dubbed backup data to the HDD, select “Resume writing data,” and go to step 7.

5 Insert the DVD you are going to make a backup of.
6 Select "Start," and press ENTER.

The recorder starts dubbing all of the contents on a DVD to the HDD.

7 Press ▲ (open/close), and replace the DVD with a recordable DVD+RW/DVD-RW or an unused DVD+R/DVD-R.

To make a backup disc of DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, insert a recordable DVD+RW or unused DVD+R.

To make a backup disc of DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, insert a recordable DVD-RW or unused DVD-R.

8 Select "Start," and press ENTER.

The recorder starts High-speed dubbing the contents that were dubbed to the HDD in step 6.

9 Select "Cancel," and press ENTER.

The disc is automatically finalised.

- To make another backup disc, replace discs, select “Start,” and press ENTER.

10 Select "Yes" or "No," and press ENTER.

To erase the backup data on the HDD, select "Yes."

To make another backup disc later, select "No."

The recorder turns off automatically when you do not use the recorder for more than 20 minutes after the dubbing has finished.

To display the dubbing information

Press DISPLAY while dubbing.

To cancel DVD backup during dubbing

Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more than one second.

To erase backup data on the HDD

1 Select "Erase back-up data" in step 4, and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

2 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

Notes

  • When dubbing to a DVD+R/DVD-R is stopped partway in step 8, you cannot play or record on the disc.
  • You cannot make a backup disc of DVD+R DLs/DVD-R DLs.
  • You may not use the “DVD Backup” function depending on the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or characteristics of the recording device and authoring software.

Before DV Camcorder Dubbing

This section explains dubbing with a DV camcorder and playing the contents of a DV camcorder via the DV IN jack on the front panel. If you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 79.

The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the i.LINK standard.

Follow the instructions in “Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing,” and then move on to the section on dubbing. For more information about i.LINK, see “About i.LINK” on page 163.

How chapters are created

The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD become a single title. This title is divided into chapters. When dubbing to the HDD or a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) and when “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” in the “Recording” setup (page 143), each shooting session on the tape becomes a chapter on the disc. For other discs, the recorder divides the title into chapters according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” setting in the “Recording” setup (page 143).

Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing

You can connect a digital video camera to the DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is straightforward because the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape for you – you do not need to operate your digital video camera. Do the following to start using the “Manual Dubbing” functions of this recorder. See the instruction manual supplied with the digital video camera as well before connecting.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing - 1

If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) or HDD.

Notes

  • You cannot make a recording while DV camcorder dubbing.
  • The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not output signals.
  • You cannot use the DV IN jack when:
    – signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel or recorder operation cannot be performed correctly when using a digital video camera (see “About i.LINK” on page 163). Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the instructions of “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 79.
  • the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do not connect a MICRO MV format digital video camera even if it has an i.LINK jack.
    – the images on the tape contain copy protection signals, which limit recording.
  • If you want to play DVDs dubbed from a DV camcorder on other DVD equipment, finalise the disc (page 45).
  • Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same colour system (page 130).

Hookups
DVD recorder to DV IN i.LINK cable (not supplied) DV output DV camcorder

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Notes - 2
Signal flow

1 Press HDD or DVD to select the recording destination.

If you select DVD, insert a disc (see "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36).

2 Insert the source DV/Digital8 format tape into your digital video camera.

For the recorder to record or edit, your digital video camera must be set to video playback mode.

3 Press REC MODE on the remote repeatedly to select the recording mode.

The recording mode changes as follows:

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Press REC MODE on the remote repeatedly to select the recording mode. - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    HQ --> HSP --> SP --> LSP --> ESP
    MN --> SEP --> SLP --> EP --> LP

For details about the recording mode, see page 71. Note that you cannot select manual recording mode.

4 Set the "External Audio" setting in the "Audio In" setup (page 138).

5 Set the "DV Input" setting in the "Audio In" setup (page 138).

You are ready to start dubbing. Select one of the dubbing methods on the following pages.

To playback DV/Digital8 format tape

You can check the contents of DV/Digital8 format tape before dubbing. For details, see “Playing from a DV Camcorder” on page 107.

Notes

  • You cannot connect more than one piece of digital video equipment to the recorder.
  • You cannot control the recorder using another device or another recorder of the same model.
  • You cannot record date, time, or the contents of the cassette memory onto the disc.

- If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape that is recorded in multiple sound tracks, such as a tape with multiple sampling frequencies (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or an unnatural sound will be output when playing back the sampling frequency switch point on the disc.

- In order to use this recorder's “Auto Chapter” setting (page 104), be sure to correctly set the clock on your digital video camera before shooting.

- The recorded picture may be momentarily affected or the start and end points of a title may be different from what you have set if the source DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the following conditions. In this case, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” (page 79).

- There is a blank space in the recorded portion of the tape.

- The tape's time code is not sequential.

- If the picture size or the recording mode on the tape being dubbed changes.

- A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed when the recorder is set to a different colour system from the DV tape contents' system. Set "Input Line System" in the "Basic" setup to the same colour system as the DV tape contents' system (page 130).

Dubbing an Entire DV Format Tape (DV One Touch Dubbing)

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can record the entire contents of a DV/ Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on the recorder. The recorder controls the digital video camera for the whole process, and completes the recording.

Follow steps 1 to 5 of "Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing" on page 104, and press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder.

The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts recording the tape contents.

After the recording is finished, the recorder rewinds the tape in the digital video camera, and finalises the recorded disc (except DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)) automatically.

To stop during recording

Press ■ REC STOP more than 3 seconds. Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording.

Hint

You can also start DV One Touch Dubbing by selecting “One-Touch Dubbing” of “DV” in the System Menu.

Notes

  • When a blank space between the recordings on the tape continues for more than two minutes, DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically.
  • The recorder will pause recording when there is a blank space or an image containing copy protection signals on the tape. The recorder will resume recording automatically when receiving a recordable signal.
  • Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts (except for DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)).
  • DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically when there are images containing copy protection signals at the beginning of the tape.

Dubbing Selected Scenes (Manual Dubbing)

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVideo

You can select and dub scenes while playing a DV/Digital8 format tape.

1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of "Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing" on page 104.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU. The System Menu appears.
3 Select "DV," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Manual Dubbing," and press ENTER.
5 Select the recording destination, "Record to Hard Disk Drive" or "Record to DVD," and press ENTER.
6 Press ▷.

The scene starts to play.

7 Find the point on the DV/Digital8 format tape that you want to start dubbing from using ◀◀/▶▶ or ◀□/□▶, and press □.
8 Select "Start Rec.," and press ENTER. The recorder starts dubbing.
9 Select "Pause Rec," and press ENTER. The recorder pauses dubbing.
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more scenes.
11 Select "Stop Rec," and press ENTER. The selected scenes are dubbed as a single title.

To cancel during "Manual Dubbing"

Press SYSTEM MENU.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Dubbing Selected Scenes (Manual Dubbing) - 2

Hint

You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the DISPLAY button during dubbing. Press the DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing menu.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Hint - 1

Note

You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one second.

Playing from a DV Camcorder

1 Connect your DV camcorder to the DV IN jack on the front panel.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select "DV," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Playback," and press ENTER.
5 Start playback on the DV camcorder.
Images from the DV camcorder appear on your TV screen.

To cancel playback

Press SYSTEM MENU.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - To cancel playback - 1

Hint

You can dub the playing tape contents. During playback, press HDD or DVD to select the dubbing destination, and press ● REC. To stop dubbing, press ■ REC STOP.

Audio Tracks

Playing Audio Tracks from CD/DVD

CD DATA DVD DATA CD

You can play audio tracks on CDs, DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs), or DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs).

AUDIO CLEAR TITLE LIST ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER PLAY MODE

1 Insert a disc.

See "1. Inserting a Disc" on page 36.

2 Press ▷.

Playback starts.

To stop playback

Press ■ (stop).

Hint

You can play audio tracks using the Title List. Press TITLE LIST. Then select a track, and press ENTER.

Note

When any video titles are recorded on a DATA DVD, the MP3 audio tracks on that DATA DVD cannot be played.

To lock the recorder (Child Lock)

You can lock all of the buttons on the recorder so that the settings are not cancelled by mistake.

When the recorder is turned off, hold down ■ on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in the front panel display. The recorder does not work except for timer recordings while the Child Lock is set.

To unlock the recorder, hold down ■ on the recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the front panel display.

Playback options

CD DATA DVD DATA CD

Buttons Operations

AUDIO Selects stereo or monauralaudio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed repeatedly in normal playback mode.
◀◀/▶▶I (previous/ next)Goes to the next or previous track when pressed during playback.For MP3 discs, goes to the next or previous album when pressed repeatedly.
◀◀/▶▶ (fast reverse/fast forward)Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback.Search speed changes as follows:fast reverse fast forward◀◀FR1 ← → ▶FF1◀◀FR2 ← ← → → ▶FF2When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button.To resume normal playback, press ▷.
■ (pause) Pauses playback.To resume normal playback, press ▷.

Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD

  • When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise will be heard from the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, the user should take proper precautions when the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are connected to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external DTS decoder must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of the recorder.
  • Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD (page 108).

Playing a specific portion repeatedly (A-B Repeat)

CD

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.

The "Play Mode" menu appears.

2 Select "A-B Repeat," and press ENTER.

"Set point A" is selected.

Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Set point A Set point B Off

3 While monitoring the sound, press ENTER at the starting point (point A) of the portion to be played repeatedly.

"Set point B" is selected.

4 Continue playing to locate the ending point (point B), and press ENTER.

A-B Repeat starts.

To cancel A-B Repeat

Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.

Hint

You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the System Menu.

Note

“A-B Repeat” is not available for MP3 audio tracks.

Playing repeatedly (Repeat)

CD

DATA DVD

DATA CD

You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a single track on an album or disc.

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.

The "Play Mode" menu appears.

2 Select "Repeat," and press ENTER.
3 Select an item to be repeated using ↑/↓.

"Repeat Disc": repeats all of the tracks on a disc.

“Repeat Album” (except for CD): repeats the current album.

“Repeat Track”: repeats the current track.

“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current programme (page 110).

4 Press ENTER.

Repeat play starts.

To cancel Repeat play

Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.

Hint

You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the System Menu.

Note

You can select “Repeat Programme” only during Programme play.

Creating your own programme (Programme)

CD

DATA DVD

DATA CD

You can play the contents of an album or disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the albums/tracks on a disc to create your own programme. You can make a programme of up to 24 steps.

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select "Programme," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Input/Edit Programme," and press ENTER.

The “Input/Edit Programme” display differs depending upon the disc type. Example: DATA DVD

Programme Current Album.01 Track.001 Step 01.01-001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Album (01-03) 01.BRAHMS 02.BEETHOVEN 03.MOZART Track (001-004) 001.SYMPHONY01 002.SYMPHONY02 003.SYMPHONY03 004.SYMPHONY04 Track Name : SYMPHONY01

4 Select an album (example: 01.BRAHMS) using ↑/↓, and press →.
5 Select a track (example: 001.SYMPHONY01) using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The track is programmed. If you make a mistake, select the step number (example: 01-001) using ←/↑/↓, and press CLEAR.

6 To programme other tracks, press ←/↑/↓/→ to select a step number, and repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 Press ▷. Programme play starts.

To cancel Programme play

Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.

To erase the programme

Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in the “Play Mode” menu.

Hints

  • The programme you made remains after Programme play finishes. To play the same programme again, set “Programme” to “Start Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu. However, the programme is cleared after you remove the disc or press ⏻/⏻.
  • You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu (page 109).
  • You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode” in the System Menu.

Searching for an Audio Track

CD DATA DVD DATA CD

You can search a disc by album or track. As albums and tracks are assigned individual numbers, select the album or track by entering its number.

Number buttons ENTER PLAY MODE

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.

The "Play Mode" menu appears.

2 Select "Search Mode," and press ENTER.

3 Select a search method, and press ENTER.

"Album Search" (except for CD)

"Track Search"

The display for entering the number appears.

Example: Album Search

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Searching for an Audio Track - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Play Mode"] --> B["Search Mode"]
    B --> C["Repeat"]
    B --> D["Programme"]
    A --> E["Album Search"]
    A --> F["Track Search"]
    A --> G["Input Album Number"]
    G --> H["2"]

4 Press the number buttons to select the number of the album or track you want.

If you make a mistake, select another number.

5 Press ENTER.

The recorder starts playback from the selected number.

Hint

You can select an album or track using ↑/↓ in step 4.

About Jukebox

There are two methods to use Jukebox: connecting the USB device or copying audio tracks to the HDD.

When using Jukebox, you can do followings:

  • Store audio tracks on the HDD.
  • Play audio tracks using various play modes.
  • Label tracks or albums.
  • Assign albums a genre.
  • Change the track order.

Notes on copying

  • You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to discs or USB devices.
  • Some audio tracks may not be copied depending on the file size.
  • You cannot copy audio tracks if the HDD is full or almost full.
  • An album name and MP3 audio track name are also copied. However, there may be some names that cannot be copied.
  • When copying is stopped partway, tracks finished copying before you stop will remain copied onto the HDD as an album. See the Album List to check which albums have been copied (page 114).
  • When copying audio tracks from a CD, the album name is labelled as “F_***” and the audio track names are labelled as “T_***” automatically.
  • During copying, other operations cannot be performed.
  • While copying, timer recordings are unavailable. If the timer is set during copying, the recorder starts the timer recording after copying is finished.
  • Copy-protected CDs cannot be copied to the HDD.

Preparing for Using Jukebox

Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the recorder, or copy audio tracks from CDs/DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected USB device to the HDD.

SYSTEM MENU ENTER HDD/DVD DUB

Connecting the USB device

You can connect a USB device to the USB jack on the recorder to listen to the MP3 audio tracks or copy to the HDD. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the USB device before connecting.

DVD recorder to USB jack USB device

Note

Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.

Copying audio tracks (DISC → HDD)

1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy to the HDD.
2 Press ▷ to start playback.
3 Press HDD/DVD DUB.

For CDs, all the tracks on the disc are copied to the HDD.

For DATA CDs/ DATA DVDs, the current album is copied to the HDD.

To cancel copying

Press ENTER.

Hint

You can copy all the contents on the disc by selecting “DVD/CD -> HDD” in “Dubbing” in the System Menu.

Copying an album (USB → HDD)

You can copy up to 99 albums or 999 tracks on the USB device to the HDD.

1 Connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder (page 112).
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Music Jukebox," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Listen to Music from USB Device," and press ENTER.

The Album List appears.

5 Select an album, and press →.
6 Select "Edit" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

7 Select "Copy Album," and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

8 Select "Yes" using ←/→, and press ENTER.

The selected album is copied to the HDD.

• To copy more albums, go to step 5.

To cancel copying

Press ENTER.

Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox/USB Device

SUBTITLE ANGLE SYSTEM MENU CLEAR ENTER ←/↑/↓/→, I← I→ II

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

2 Select "Music Jukebox," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Listen to Music / Edit" or "Listen to Music from USB Device," and press ENTER.

To listen to the audio tracks on the HDD, select "Listen to Music / Edit."

To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from the connected USB device, select "Listen to Music from USB Device."

The Album List appears.

Music Jukebox 10 Albums By number All Genres 1 The Best 2 Opera 3 Symphony 4 Samba 5 Live 6 Piano 7 My heart 8 Paradise The Best Total 5 30MB ALL Play Crase Edit Play Mode Genre Name HDD Remain 228.8G Jazz

4 Select an album or track, and press ENTER.

Playback starts from the selected album or track.

To stop playback

Press ■ (stop).

To scroll the list display by page (Page mode)

Press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next) while the Album List is displayed. Each time you press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next), the entire Album List changes to the next/previous page of the album.

To change the album order (Sort Titles) (HDD only)

1 Press ← while the Album List is displayed.
2 Select "Sort Titles" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
3 Select the item using / , and press ENTER.

Order Sorted

By number In order of album number.
By favourite In order of playback times. The album that is most often played is listed at the top.
By album In alphabetical order.

To search for the album by genre (Genre) (HDD only)

1 Press ← while the Album List is displayed.
2 Select "Genre" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
3 Select the genre using / , and press ENTER. The albums in the selected genre appear. To display all albums, select "All Genres."

To skip a track (Set Skip)

If you want a track not to play, set the track to be skipped.

1 Select a track you want to skip.
2 Press while the Album List is displayed.
3 Select "Edit" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
4 Select "Set Skip" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER. "♥appears next to the selected track. To cancel, select "Set Skip," and press ENTER again.

Playback options

Buttons Operations
|◀◀/▶▶|(previous/next)Goes to the next or previous track when pressed during playback.
◀◀/▶▶(fast reverse/fast forward)Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback.Search speed changes as follows:fast reverse fast forwardWhen you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button.To resume normal playback, press ▷.
■ (pause) Pauses playback.To resume normal playback, press ▷.

Playing repeatedly (Repeat)

You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a single track in the album.

1 Press → during playback.
2 Select "Play Mode," using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
The "Play Mode" menu appears.

3 Select "Repeat," and press ENTER.

4 Select an item to be repeated using ↑/↓.

“Repeat Album”: repeats the current album.

“Repeat Track”: repeats the current track.

"Repeat Programme": repeats the current programme (page 116).

5 Press ENTER.

Repeat play starts.

To cancel Repeat play

Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.

Notes

  • You can select “Repeat Programme” only during Programme play.
  • “A-B Repeat” is not available when using “Music Jukebox.”

Creating your own programme (Programme)

You can play the contents of the HDD or connected USB device in the order you want by arranging the order of the tracks on the HDD or connected USB device to create your own programme. You can make a programme of up to 24 steps.

1 Press → while the Album List is displayed.
2 Select "Play Mode," using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
The "Play Mode" menu appears.
3 Select "Programme," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Input/Edit Programme," and press ENTER.

Programme Step 01.001-001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Album (001-104) Album 001 Album 002 Album 003 Album 004 Album 005 Album 006 Album 007 Album 008 Track (001-002) Track 001 Track 002

5 Select an album (example: Album 001) using ↑/↓, and press →.

6 Select a track (example: Track 001) using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The track is programmed. If you make a mistake, select the step number (example: 01.) using ←/↑/↓, and press CLEAR.

7 To programme other tracks, press ←/↑/↓/→ to select a step number, and repeat steps 5 and 6.

8 Press ▷. Programme play starts.

To cancel Programme play

Set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu during playback.

To erase the programme

Set “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in the “Play Mode” menu.

Hints

  • You can select and play a track that is set to “Set Skip.”
  • The programme you made remains after Programme play finishes. To play the same programme again, set “Programme” to “Start Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu. However, the programme is cleared after you press ⏻/⏻.
  • You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu (page 115).

Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox

You can erase or label albums/tracks on the HDD. You can also assign an album a genre.

SYSTEM MENU ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

2 Select "Music Jukebox," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Listen to Music / Edit," and press ENTER.

The Album List appears.

Music Jukebox 10 Albums By number All Genres 1 The Best 2 Opera 3 Symphony 4 Samba 5 Live 6 Piano 7 My heart 8 Paradise The Best ALL 1 2 3 4 5 Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name HDO Remain 228.8G Total 5 30MB

4 Select an album or track, and press

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox - 3

5 Select an option, and press ENTER.

"Erase": Erases the selected album/track. Select "Yes" when asked for confirmation.

"Edit": Allows you to make the following edits.

  • “Album Name”: Allows you to enter or re-enter an album name (page 42).
  • "Track Name": Allows you to enter or re-enter a track name (page 42).
  • "Set Genre": Assigns an album a genre.
  • "Set Skip": Sets a track to be skipped (page 115).

"Play Mode": Selects play modes (page 115).

"Genre Name": Allows you to enter a genre name (up to 12 characters) (page 42).

Note

You cannot edit audio tracks on the connected USB device.

JPEG Image Files

About the "Photo Album" Function

The "Photo Album" function enables you to do following.

  • Store JPEG image files on the HDD.
  • View JPEG image files on the HDD, DATA DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs)/DATA CDs, or connected USB device.
  • Edit JPEG image files.
  • Print JPEG image files.
  • Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs.

Preparing for Using the "Photo Album" Function

Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the recorder, or copy JPEG image files from DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected USB device to the HDD.

SYSTEM MENU ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

Connecting the USB device

You can connect a USB device (digital still camera, Memory card reader, and USB memory) to the USB jack on the recorder to view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the USB device before connecting.

DVD recorder
to USB jack USB cable (not supplied) USB output Digital still camera

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Connecting the USB device - 2
: Signal flow

Note

Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.

Copying JPEG image files to the HDD (DISC/USB → HDD)

1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy to the HDD or connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" menu appears.

4 Select the item, and press ENTER.

To copy from DATA CDs/DATA DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs), select “View Photos on a CD/DVD.”

To copy from the connected USB device, select "View Photos on a USB Device."

The “Photo Album” list appears.

Example: CD/DVD

Photo Album CD/DVD Album Select Album 001 F_001 002 F_002 003 F_003 004 F_004 005 F_005 006 F_006 007 F_007 008 F_008 HDD Remain 226.5G 001 F_001 Files 5 Album Size 2.8MB 1/9

5 Select an album or JPEG image file using ↑/↓, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

6 Select an item, and press ENTER.

To copy two or more albums or JPEG image files, select "Multi-Mode."

To copy all the albums and JPEG image files, select "Copy all to HDD," and go to step 11.

To copy the album or file selected in step 5 only, select "Copy to HDD," and go to step 11.

7 Select an album or JPEG image file, and press ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item.

• To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.

- To clear all check marks, press → to select “Single-Mode” from the sub-menu.

8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the albums or JPEG image files you want to copy.

9 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

10 Select "Copy to HDD," and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

11 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

- To cancel, select "No."

Copying all JPEG image files from the connected USB device (USB → DVD-RW/DVD-R)

1 Connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder.
2 Insert a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

4 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" menu appears.

5 Select "Copy Photos from a Digital Camera," and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

6 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

- To cancel, select "No."

Hint

See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 47) to format DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.

Notes

  • During copying, other operations cannot be performed.
  • While copying JPEG image files, timer recordings are unavailable. If the timer is set during copying, the recorder starts the timer recording after copying is finished.

Copying JPEG image files or albums on the HDD (HDD ↔ HDD)

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

2 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The “Photo Album” menu appears.

3 Select "View/Edit Photos on the HDD," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" list appears.

4 Select an album using ↑/↓.

To copy the selected album, go to step 6. To copy a JPEG image file, go to step 5.

5 Press ENTER, and select a JPEG image file using ↑/↓.

6 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

7 Select an item, and press ENTER.

To copy two or more albums or files, select "Multi-Mode."

To copy the selected album, select “Copy Album Contents” in “Album Options,” and go to step 12.

To copy the selected files, select "Copy" in "File Options," and go to step 12.

8 Select an album or JPEG image file, and press ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item.

  • To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.
  • To clear all check marks, select "Single-Mode."

9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the albums or JPEG image files you want to copy.

10 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

11 Select "Copy," and press ENTER.

12 Select the destination album using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

- To cancel, select "No."

Note

Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the HDD in the following cases.

- when the HDD disc space is insufficient for copying.

- when there are already the maximum number of files and/or albums on the HDD.

Copying JPEG image albums to a disc (HDD → DVD-RW/DVD-R)

You can copy the edited JPEG image albums to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).

A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a video file. You can play the slideshow on other DVD equipment that may not be compatible with the playback of JPEG image files.

1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video mode).

2 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The “Photo Album” menu appears.

4 Select "View/Edit Photos on the HDD," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" list appears.

5 Select an album using ↑/↓, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

6 Select "Multi-Mode," and press ENTER.

To copy the album selected in step 5 only, go to step 10.

7 Select an album, and press ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item.

  • To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.
  • To clear all check marks, select "Single-Mode."

8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the albums you want to copy.

9 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

10 Select "Copy to DVD," and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

11 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

The selected JPEG image albums are copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the disc.

The JPEG image album names are automatically labelled as “***ALBUM.” If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment, finalise the disc (page 45).

- To cancel, select "No."

Hints

  • See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 47) to format DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
  • See the “Photo Album” list to check which albums have been copied (page 122).

Notes

  • You may not be able to play the slideshow depending on DVD equipment.
  • You cannot copy JPEG image files to a recordable DVD which has been recorded using other recorders/devices.
  • DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not be able to play on other equipment (page 45).
  • No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a disc.
  • When copying an album containing more than 99 JPEG image files to a disc, slideshows will be created with every 99 JPEG image files and recorded to a disc.
  • For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not increase even if you erase slideshows.

Copying JPEG image files to a disc (HDD → DVD-RW/DVD-R)

You can copy the edited JPEG image files to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).

A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a video file. You can play the slideshow on other DVD equipment that may not be compatible with the playback of JPEG image files.

1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video mode).

2 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

3 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" menu appears.

4 Select "View/Edit Photos on the HDD," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" list appears.

5 Select an album using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The photo list appears.

6 Select a JPEG image file using ↑/↓, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

7 Select "Multi-Mode," and press ENTER.

To copy the JPEG image file selected in step 6 only, go to step 11.

8 Select a JPEG image file, and press ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item.

  • To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.
  • To clear all check marks, select "Single-Mode."

9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the JPEG image files you want to copy.

10 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

11 Select "Copy to DVD," and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

12 Select "Yes," and press ENTER.

The selected JPEG image files are copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the disc. The JPEG image file names are automatically labelled as “PHOT****.” If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment, finalise the disc (page 45).

- To cancel, select "No."

To select a JPEG image file from a different album

1 Switch to the album list in step 8. For instructions, see “To switch between the album list and JPEG image file list” on page 123.

2 Select an album using / , and press .

3 Switch to the JPEG image file list. For instructions, see “To switch between the album list and JPEG image file list” on page 123.
4 Select a JPEG image file using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

Hints

  • See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 47) to format DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
  • See the “Photo Album” list to check which albums have been copied (page 122).

Notes

  • You may not be able to play the slideshow depending on DVD equipment.
  • You cannot copy JPEG image files to a recordable DVD which has been recorded using other recorders/devices.
  • DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not be able to play on other equipment (page 45).
  • No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a disc.
  • For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not increase even if you erase slideshows.

Using the "Photo Album" List

You can play JPEG image files on the HDD, DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected USB device using the "Photo Album" list.

ANGLE SYSTEM MENU EXIT/ RETURN ZOOM ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

2 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" menu appears.

3 Select the item, and press ENTER.

To play JPEG image files on the HDD, select "View/Edit Photos on the HDD."

To play JPEG image files on DATA CDs/DATA DVDs, select “View Photos on a CD/DVD.”

To play JPEG image files from the connected USB device, select “View Photos on a USB Device.”

The “Photo Album” list appears.

4 Select an album using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

To show the 4-Photo List or 1-Photo List, press ← to select “Title View,” and press ENTER, then select “4 Photos” or “1 Photo” using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

12-Photo List (Example: HDD)
Photo Album HDD File 12 Photos Zoo 001 Elephant 002 Giraffe 003 Bear 004 Lion 005 Ostrich 006 Monkey 007 Catf 008 Keela 009 Swan 010 Gorilla 011 Hippopelantus 012 Kangaroo Album Size 999MB 1/58 6 HDD Remain 226.5GB 1 2 3 4 5

4-Photo List

Photo Album HDD File 4 Photos Zoo Album Size 999MB 001 13:00 6/05/2007 Elephant 1280x768 128KB 002 13:30 6/05/2007 Giraffe 1280x768 128KB 003 13:44 6/05/2007 Bear 1280x768 128KB 004 15:03 6/05/2007 Lion 1280x768 128KB HDD Remain 226.5B 1/58 2 3 4 5

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Using the "Photo Album" List - 4

1- Photo List
1 Photo Album HDD File 1 Photo Zoo Album Size 999MB 2 3 4 6 HDD Remain 226.5G 001 Elephant 1280x768 128KB 1/58 5

1 Album name
2 Album size

3 Sub-menu:

Press to display the sub-menu.

The sub-menu displays options applicable only to the selected item. The displayed options differ depending upon the model, situation, and disc type.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Sub-menu: - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["File 12 Photos"] --> B["001 Elephant"]
    A --> C["002 Giraffe"]
    A --> D["003 Bear"]
    A --> E["004 Lion"]
    A --> F["005 Ostrich"]
    A --> G["006 Monkey"]
    A --> H["007 Cat"]
    A --> I["008 Keala"]
    A --> J["009 Swan"]
    A --> K["010 Gorilla"]
    A --> L["011 Hipposotarius"]
    A --> M["012 Kangaroo"]
    N["Sub-menu"] --> O["Start Slideshow"]
    N --> P["Start Audio Slideshow"]
    N --> Q["File Options"]
    N --> R["Print"]
    N --> S["Copy to DVD"]
    N --> T["Detailed Information"]
    N --> U["Multi-Mode"]
    N --> V["1/58"]

4 Scroll bar:

Appears when all of the JPEG image files do not fit on the list. To view the hidden JPEG image files, press ↑/↓.

5 Album and JPEG image file information:

Displays the image, JPEG image file number, recording date and time, JPEG image file name, and JPEG image file size.

6Disc type and remaining space of current disc

To scroll the list display by page (Page mode)

Press ◀◀◀/▶▶▶ while the “Photo Album” list is displayed. Each time you press ◀◀◀/▶▶▶, the entire “Photo Album” list changes to the next/previous page of albums/JPEG image files.

To switch between the album list and JPEG image file list

1 Press ← while the "Photo Album" list is displayed.
2 Select "Display Mode" using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
3 Select "File" or "Album" using / , and press ENTER.

To turn off the "Photo Album" list

Press SYSTEM MENU.

To reload the files or folders

When a disc or the connected USB device contains 1,000 or more files and/or 100 or more folders, select “Read next” in the “Photo Album” list, and press ENTER to view unloaded files or folders. It may take a few minutes to load files or folders.

Note

The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on the recorder is displayed as “⚠️

Viewing a JPEG image file

1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of "Using the "Photo Album" List."

The “Photo Album” list appears. Switch to the album list, if necessary.

2 Select a JPEG image file using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.

The selected JPEG image file is displayed on the entire screen.

To display the detailed information

1 Select a JPEG image file, and press →.

2 Select “Detailed Information,” and press ENTER. The detailed information for the selected JPEG image file appears.

Playing a slideshow

1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of "Using the "Photo Album" List."

The “Photo Album” list appears. Switch between the album list and JPEG image file list, if necessary.

2 Select an album or JPEG image file using ↑/↓, and press ▷.

The slideshow starts. If you press ▷ while selecting a JPEG image file, the slideshow starts from the selected JPEG image file.

To play a slideshow with the sound (HDD only)

You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to the sound stored in the HDD.

1 Select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD” in step 3 of “Using the “Photo Album” List” on page 122. The “Photo Album” list appears. Switch between the album list and JPEG image file list, if necessary.

2 Select an album or JPEG image file using ↑/↓, and press →.

3 Select "Start Audio Slideshow," and press ENTER.

4 Select a genre using / . For details about assigning a genre, see "Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox" on page 117.

5 Select "Start," and press ENTER. The slideshow and the playback from the first track of the selected genre start.

Notes

  • Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bands at top and bottom, or left and right.
  • Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is not a malfunction.
  • All albums or tracks in the selected genre will be played during Slideshow even if some albums or tracks are set to skip.

To stop a slideshow

Press ■ (stop) or 📌 RETURN.

To pause a slideshow

Press Ⅲ (pause). Note that only slideshow pauses and the sound continues to play.

To view the next/previous image during a slideshow

Press ◀◀◀/▶▶▶.

To zoom an image

Press ZOOM repeatedly during a slideshow. Each time you press ZOOM, the magnification changes as shown below. 2×4× normal magnification You can move the area you want to zoom using /// .

To rotate an image

Press ANGLE repeatedly during a slideshow. Each time you press ANGLE, the image turns clockwise by 90°.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - To rotate an image - 1

You can start a slideshow by selecting “Start Slideshow” from the sub-menu.

Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD

SYSTEM MENU ←/↑/↓/→, ENTER

1 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

2 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The “Photo Album” menu appears.

3 Select "View/Edit Photos on the HDD," and press ENTER.

The “Photo Album” list appears.

4 Select an album or JPEG image file, and press →.

The sub-menu appears.

5 Select an option, and press ENTER.

You can make the following edits to the album/JPEG image file.

"Start Slideshow": Starts a slideshow (page 124).

“Start Audio Slideshow” (HDD only): Starts a slideshow with the sound (page 124).

"New Album": Creates a new album.

"Album Options"

- “Erase Album”: Erases the selected album.

- “Copy Album Contents”: Copies all JPEG image files in the selected album to the HDD (page 119).

  • “Rename Album”: Changes the selected album name (page 42).
  • "Protect Album Contents": Protects all JPEG image files in the selected album.
  • “Cancel Protection”: Cancels protection of all JPEG image files in the selected album.

"Copy to DVD": Copies the selected album or JPEG image file to a DVD (page 120).

"Multi-Mode": Selects multiple albums or JPEG image files to edit.

"Copy all to HDD": Copies all the albums and JPEG image files to the HDD (page 118).

"Copy to HDD": Copies the selected album or JPEG image file to the HDD (page 118).

"File Options"

  • “Erase”: Erases the selected JPEG image file.
  • “Copy”: Copies the selected JPEG image file (page 119).
  • “Rename File”: Changes the selected JPEG image file name (page 42).
  • “Protect”: Protects the selected JPEG image file. Select again to cancel the protection.

"Print": Prints the selected JPEG image file (page 126).

“Detailed Information”: Displays the detailed information for the selected JPEG image file (page 124).

"Single-Mode": Cancels "Multi-Mode."

Printing JPEG Image Files

You can print JPEG image files on the HDD, DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected USB device by connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB jack on the recorder.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the printer.

SYSTEM MENU ENTER

1 Connect a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB jack on the recorder.

PictBridge to USB jack DVD recorder PictBridge-compatible printer

2 Connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder.

When printing JPEG image files on the HDD, skip this step.

3 Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

4 Select "Photo Album," and press ENTER.

The "Photo Album" menu appears.

5 Select the item, and press ENTER.

To print JPEG image files on the HDD, select "View/Edit Photos on the HDD." To print JPEG image files on a DATA DVD/DATA CD, select "View Photos on a CD/DVD."

To print JPEG image files from the connected USB device, select "View Photos on a USB Device."

The "Photo Album" list appears.

6 Select an album, and press ENTER.

Photo Album HDD File 12 Photos Zoo 001 Elephant 002 Giraffe 003 Bear 004 Lion 005 Ostrich 006 Monkey 007 Calf 008 Koota 009 Swan 010 Gorilla 011 Hippopotamus 012 Kangaroo Album Size 999MB HDD Remain 226.5G 1/58

7 Select a file using ↑/↓, and press

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Printing JPEG Image Files - 4

The sub-menu appears.

8 Select the item, and press ENTER.

To print two or more files, select "Multi-Mode."

To print the file selected in step 7 only, go to step 12.

9 Select a file, and press ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item.

• To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.

- To clear all check marks, select "Single-Mode."

10 Repeat step 9 to select all files you want to print.

11 Press →.

The sub-menu appears.

12 Select "Print," and press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

13 Select "Start," and press ENTER.

You can set the paper size and layout. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the printer.

To cancel printing

Press ENTER.

To display the connected printer

Select "Confirm Printer" of "USB" in the "Options 2" setup (page 150).

To restart the connected USB device

Select "Restart USB Device" of "USB" in the "Options 2" setup (page 150).

Hint

Printing options, such as paper size or layout, differ depending on the printer. For details, refer to the instructions supplied with the printer.

Settings and Adjustments

Disc Settings (Disc Setup)

The “Disc Setup” setup allows you to adjust DVD related settings.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.

The “Disc Setup” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Disc Setup Basic Format Finalise Optimise HDD Input Disc Name Protect Disc Format DVD-RW ► Next Screen ► Off ► VR Mode

Basic

◆ Input Disc Name

You can label a disc.

For details, see page 43.

◆ Protect Disc

You can protect a disc against erasure. For details, see page 44.

◆ Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)

The recorder automatically starts formatting in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is selected below, when a new, unformatted DVD-RW is inserted.

VR ModeAutomatically formats the disc in VR mode.
Video ModeAutomatically formats the disc in Video mode.

Format

You can manually re-format a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R disc to make a blank disc.

For details, see page 47.

Finalise

Finalises a disc to play it on other DVD equipment.

For details, see page 45.

Optimise HDD

As you record, erase and edit recordings repeatedly, the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. To ‘clean up’ all the fragmented files, optimise the HDD periodically. When the HDD needs optimising, a message recommending optimisation will appear automatically.

1 Select "Optimise HDD" in "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.

2 Select "Start," and press ENTER. A progress bar appears and the optimisation starts. To cancel optimisation, press ENTER. The HDD will be partly optimised.

Notes

  • It will take about eight hours to optimise the HDD. During optimisation, other operations, such as recording or playback, cannot be performed.
  • You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD disc space is insufficient for optimising. Erase titles to open up disc space (page 92).

Format HDD.

You can format the HDD and resolve the problem when the hard disk error occurred. "Format HDD." can be selected only when the hard disk needs formatting. Note that all of the recorded content on the HDD will be erased.

1 Select "Format HDD." in "Disc Setup," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Start," and press ENTER.

Recorder Settings (Basic)

The "Basic" setup helps you to make clock and other recorder related settings.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Basic," and press ENTER.

The “Basic” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

To turn off the display, press SYSTEM MENU.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Clock Setting Input Line System Power Save HELP Setting EPG Type Select Easy Setup 0:00

Clock Setting

The recorder will automatically set the clock when any digital channels have been scanned and stored.

◆ Auto (Auto Clock Set)

Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a programme position in your local area broadcasts a time signal.

1 Select "Clock Setting" in "Basic," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Auto," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Clock Input Power HELP EPG T Easy S Auto Clock Setting Date Time Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start

3 Press / repeatedly until the programme position of the station that carries a time signal appears.
4 Press ↓ to select "Start," and press ENTER.

- If the recorder does not receive a time signal from any station, press

RETURN and set the clock manually.

- If the Auto Clock Set function did not set the clock correctly for your local area, try another station for the Auto Clock Set function or set the clock manually.

◆ Manual (Manual Clock Set)

Set the clock manually.

1 Select "Clock Setting" in "Basic," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Manual," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Clock Input Power HELP EPG 1 Easy S Manual Clock Setting 1/2 Time Zone ← Austria Vienna Summer Time Off

3 Press ←/→ to select the time zone for your area, and press ↓.
4 Select "On" if you are now on summer time, and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Clock Input Power HELP EPG T Easy S Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date MON 1 / 01 / 2007 Time 0 - 30 Time Zone Austria Vienna Summer Time Off

5

Press ↑/↓ to set the day, and press →. Set the month, year, hour, and minutes in sequence. Press ←/→ to select the item to be set, then press ↑/↓ to set the numbers. The day of the week is set automatically.

To change the numbers, press ← to return to the item to be changed, and press ↑/↓.

6 Press ENTER to start the clock.

Input Line System

Selects the colour system when recording from the connected equipment.

NTSC Records in NTSC or PAL-60 colour system.
PAL/SECAMRecords in PAL or SECAM colour system.

Notes

  • When picture noise appears after you change the “Input Line System” setting, change the “Input Colour System” setting (page 136). If picture noise still appears, hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder.
  • When you change the “Input Line System” setting, the Dubbing List is erased.

Power Save

Selects whether this recorder is in power save mode when the power is turned off (standby).

Mode 1 Onlyantenna input signals are output to the connected TV when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2 Noinput signals are output when the recorder is in standby.
OffDoes not set to power save mode. Normally, select this setting.

Note

Power Save mode does not function in the following cases, even when “Power Save” is set to “Mode 1” or “Mode 2.”

  • There is a timer setting with "VPS / PDC" in the SCHEDULE list.
  • The SMARTLINK features are not available when “Power Save” is set to “Mode 1” or “Mode 2.”

HELP Setting

On DisplaysHelp information for GUI displays.
Off Does notset to HELP setting mode.

EPG Type Select

Selects the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) type to use.

GUIDEPlus+Select this to use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide (page 63).
Guide(Digital)Select this to use the digital electronic programme guide (page 48).

Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder)

Select this to run the “Easy Setup” programme.

1 Select "Easy Setup" in "Basic," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Start," and press ENTER.
3 Follow the instructions for “Easy Setup” (page 26) from step 2.

Aerial Reception Settings (Digital Tuner)

The “Digital Tuner” setup helps you to make digital tuner and programme position settings for the recorder.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Digital Tuner," and press ENTER.

The “Digital Tuner” setup display appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined. To turn off the display, press SYSTEM MENU.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Replace Channels Add New Channels Channel Sort Channel Options Auto Skip Signal Check D.TV Language Next Screen

Replace Channels

Scans available digital channels, and replaces all the channels already stored in the channel list with the scanned results.

1 Select "Replace Channels" in "Digital Tuner," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.
3 Select your country/region using ←/→, and press ENTER.

The recorder scans available digital channels and stores them.

To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM MENU or EXIT.

If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels, you can disable them (page 132).

Note

The timer settings for the replaced channels are deleted.

Add New Channels

Scans digital channels and adds found channels to the channel list.

1 Select "Add New Channels" in "Digital Tuner," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER. The recorder scans channels and stores them.

To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM MENU or EXIT.

Channel Sort

After the programme positions have been set, you can change the order of each programme position in the displayed list.

1 Select "Channel Sort" in "Digital Tuner," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.

Channel Sort 1/2 D001 DSE News D008 Digital Teletext D002 AAC D010 HGF D003 NCE S D011 Channel 9 D004 Channel J D012 AAB D005 CDE D014 CCD D006 FGH

3 Press ↑/↓ to select a programme position you want to move, and press ENTER.

• To display other pages, press ↑/↓ repeatedly.
4 Press ↑/↓ to select the programme position number to swap for the one selected in step 3, and press ENTER. The programme position numbers are swapped.
• To move other programme positions, repeat from step 3.

Channel Options

You can skip or lock certain channels.

1 Select "Channel Options" in "Digital Tuner," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.
3 Enter your four-digit password using the number buttons, and press ENTER. To set a password, see page 145.

Channel Options Channel Skip | D001 DDE News D002 AAC D003 NCE 5 D004 Channel J D005 CDE D006 FGH D007 CMY

4 Select the programme position you want to skip or lock using ↑/↓, and press ENTER.
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Channel Options - 2

• To skip the programme position, select
• To lock the programme position, select G.

A check mark appears in the check box next to the selected programme position.

Auto Skip

Selects whether to skip radio or data channels.

Off No channels are skipped.
Radio Radiochannels are skipped.
Data Data channels are skipped.
Radio & DataRadio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels.

Signal Check

You can check the signal strength and quality of the channel.

1 Select "Signal Check" in "Digital Tuner," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.

Signal Check RF Channel 50 Add New Channels Signal Strength : 80% 0 25 50 75 100 Signal Quality : 100% Good

To check the signal strength and quality of other channels, select a channel using

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Signal Check - 2

D.TV Language

Selects main and sub audio/subtitle languages or teletext language for bilingual programmes.

1 Select "D.TV Language" in "Digital Tuner," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.

Language Settings Primary Audio English Secondary Audio Other Primary Subtitle English Secondary Subtitle Other Teletext English

3 Select an item using / .
4 Select a language using ←/→.

Aerial Reception Settings (Analog Tuner)

The “Analog Tuner” setup helps you to make analogue tuner and programme position settings for the recorder.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Analog Tuner," and press ENTER.

The “Analog Tuner” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

To turn off the display, press SYSTEM MENU.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping Auto Scan Download from TV

Auto Channel Setting

Auto Scan

If you connect a TV to this recorder not using SMARTLINK, you can preset programme positions automatically using "Auto Scan."

1 Select "Auto Channel Setting" in "Analog Tuner," and press ENTER.

2 Select "Auto Scan," and press ENTER.

3 Select your country/region using ←/→, and press ENTER.

The programme position order will be set according to the country/region you set. If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels, you can disable them (page 134).

Download from TV

If you connect a TV to this recorder with SMARTLINK, you can preset programme positions by downloading from your TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV.

1 Select "Download from TV," and press ENTER.
2 Select your country/region using / , and press ENTER.
The tuner preset data will be downloaded from your TV to this recorder.
If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels, you can disable them (page 134).

Manual CH Setting

Presets programme positions manually. If some programme positions could not be set using the “Easy Setup” function, you can set them manually.

If there is no sound or if the picture is distorted, the wrong tuner system may have been preset during “Easy Setup.” Set the correct tuner system manually in the steps below.

1 Select "Manual CH Setting" in "Analog Tuner," and press ENTER.

2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.

3 Select your country/region using / , and press ENTER.

Programme position AA3 Pr 1 Skip Off CH System Western Euro Channel 1 AFT On Level — Sound System BIG Name AAB Decoder Off

4 Press ◀◀◀/▶▶▶ to select the programme position.

5 Select the item you want to change using ↑/↓, and change the settings using ←/→, then press ENTER.

• To preset another programme position, repeat from step 4.

Skip

On Select thiswhen the programme position is unused or contains unwanted channels. The selected position will be skipped when you press PROG +/-.
Off Does notskip the selected programme position.

CH System

Select the region to get the best broadcast reception.

FR Select this when in France.
Western EuroSelect this when in West European countries.
UK & IE Select this when in Great Britain/Ireland.
Eastern EuroSelect this when in East European countries.

AFT

OnTurns on the Auto Fine Tuning function.Normally select this position.
Off Allows you to adjust the picture manually.

- If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not work effectively, select "Off" and press ↓. Press ←/→ to obtain a clearer picture, and press ENTER.

Sound System

Select an available TV system (page 135).

B/G Select this when in West European countries, except those listed in “Receivable channels” on page 135.
D/K Select this when in East European countries.
I Select this when in Great Britain/Ireland.
L Select this when in France.

Name

Changes or enters a new station name (up to 5 characters). The recorder must receive programme position information (e.g., SMARTLINK information) for station names to appear automatically.

Press , then press / repeatedly to select a character.

To change the characters, press / to move the cursor, and press / .

Decoder

Sets the external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) channels.

For details, see page 34.

Channel

Press / repeatedly until the programme position you want is displayed.

- To select a cable or satellite programme position, press / until the programme position you want is displayed.

◆ Receivable channels

TV system Channel coverage

BG (West European Countries, except those listed below)E2 – E12 VHF
Italia A – H VHF
E21 – E69 UHF
S1 – S20 CATV
S21 – S41 HYPER
S01 – S05 CATV
DK (East European Countries)R1 – R12 VHF
R21 – R69 UHF
S1 – S20 CATV
S21 – S41 HYPER
S01 – S05 CATV
I (Great Britain/ Ireland)Ireland A – J VHF
South Africa 4 – 11, 13 VHF
B21 – B69 UHF
S1 – S20 CATV
S21 – S41 HYPER
S01 – S05 CATV
L* (France) F2 – F10 VHF

* To receive broadcasts in France, select "L."

Channel Swapping

After the programme positions have been set, you can change the order of each programme position in the display list.

1 Select "Channel Swapping" in "Analog Tuner," and press ENTER.
2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup [1] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Pr System CH Name Pr System CH Name 1 B/G 2 1 B/G 2 2 B/G 3 2 B/G 3 3 B/G 4 3 B/G 4 4 B/G 5 4 B/G 5 5 B/G 6 5 B/G 6 6 B/G 7 6 B/G 7 Swap Preset 1 ◀ 1

3 Press ↑/↓ to select the programme position number you want to swap, and press →.

- To display other pages, press ◀◀◀/▶▶▶I repeatedly.

4 Press ↑/↓ to select the programme position number to swap for the one selected in step 3, and press ENTER. The programme position numbers are swapped.

• To swap the programme position number of another station, repeat from step 3.

Video Settings (Video In/Out)

The “Video In/Out” settings will adjust items related to the image, such as size and colour. Select the settings according to the type of TV, tuner, or decoder connected to the DVD recorder.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Video In/Out," and press ENTER.

The “Video In/Out” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Input Colour System Component Video Out LINE 3 Out LINE 1 In NTSC on PAL TV Next Screen

Input Colour System

Selects the colour system when picture noise appears after you change the “Input Line System” setting (page 130).

Auto Recorder automatically detects signals of colour systems and selects the appropriate colour system.
PAL Selects thePAL colour system when “Input Line System” is set to “PAL/SECAM.”
SECAM Selectsthe SECAM colour system when “Input Line System” is set to “PAL/SECAM.”

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Input Colour System - 1

When "Input Line System" is set to "NTSC," you can select "Auto," "3.58NTSC," or "PAL-60."

Note

"Input Colour System" cannot be set when viewing digital broadcasts.

Component Video Out

Selects the signal format in which the recorder outputs video signals: interlace or progressive, from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks.

Normal(Interlace)Outputs signals in the interlace format.
Progressive Outputsinputs signals in the progressive format. Select this when you want to view progressive signals.

Notes

  • When you set "LINE 3 Out" to "RGB," you cannot set "Component Video Out."
  • When you connect the recorder to a monitor or projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, do not set "LINE 3 Out" to "RGB." If you set "LINE 3 Out" to "RGB," in this case, the picture may not appear.
  • When picture noise appears after you set the recorder to progressive format, hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder, and press ▲ (open/close) on the recorder.
  • No video signals are output when using the HDMI connection.

LINE 3 Out

Selects a method of outputting video signals for the LINE 3 - TV jack.

VideoOutputs video signals.
S-Video OutputsS-video signals.
RGB Outputs RGB signals.

Notes

  • If your TV does not accept S-video or RGB signals, the image will not be displayed in the selected method on the TV screen even if you select “S-Video” or “RGB.” See the instructions supplied with your TV.
  • SMARTLINK is available only when "Video" is selected.
  • RGB signals are not output when using the HDMI connection.

LINE 1 In

Selects a method of inputting video signals for the LINE 1/DECODER jack. The picture will not be clear if this setting does not match the type of video input signal.

Video Inputs video signals.
S-Video InputsS-video signals.
RGB Inputs RGB signals.
Decoder Selectthis when connecting to an external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder). If you connect to a cable box/satellite receiver such as CanalSat, do not select this option.

NTSC on PAL TV

Sets the recorder to convert signals of the NTSC colour system to the PAL colour system to play NTSC discs on PAL-only TVs. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV.

OnPlays NTSC discs on PAL-only TVs.
Off Select this ifthe connected TV is a multi-system (NTSC-compatible) TV.

Audio Input Settings (Audio In)

The “Audio In” setup allows you to adjust the sound according to the playback and connection conditions.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Audio In," and press ENTER.

The “Audio In” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording NICAM Select Analog Tuner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording DV Input NICAM Standard

NICAM Select (page 72)

NICAM Normally select this position.
Standard Selectthis if the sound from NICAM broadcasts is not clear.

Analog Tuner Level

If the playback sound is distorted, set this item to "Compression." The recorder reduces the audio output level.

This function affects the output of the following jacks:

  • LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks
  • LINE 3 - TV jack
  • LINE 1/DECODER jack
NormalNormally select this position.
Compression SSelect this when the playback sound from the speakers is distorted.

External Audio

Stereo Select thiswhen receiving stereo programmes from connected equipment.
Bilingual Select thiswhen receiving bilingual programmes from connected equipment.

Note

When receiving audio input signals from the DV input jack, the recorder automatically selects "Stereo" or "Bilingual" regardless of the "External Audio" setting.

Bilingual Recording

Selects the sound to be recorded.

A/LRecords the main sound for the bilingual programme.
B/R Records the sub sound for the bilingual programme.

Note

When recording a bilingual audio signal to the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode Off” (page 144) (except in PCM mode)) or a DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode (except in PCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can select the sound when playing.

DV Input

Select the setting for the audio input when DV camcorder dubbing.

Select “Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)”/“Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)”/“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” or “Stereo 2” only if you have added a second audio when recording with your digital video camera.

Stereo 1Records original sound only. Normally select this when dubbing a DV format tape.
Stereo 2 Records additional audio only.
Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)Records both stereo 1 and 2.
Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)
Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)

Audio Output Settings (Audio Out)

The “Audio Out” setup allows you to switch the method of outputting audio signals when you connect a component such as an amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack. If you connect a component that does not accept the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no sound) will come from the speakers, and may affect your ears or cause speaker damage.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Audio Out," and press ENTER.

The “Audio Out” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Delby Digital Output DTS Output 96 kHz PCM Output MPEG Output Audio DRC ■ Delby Digital Delby Digital → PCM

Dolby Digital Output (HDD/DVDs only)

Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.

Dolby Digital Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder.
Dolby Digital -> PCMSelect this when the recorder is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in Dolby Digital decoder.

Note

If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with Dolby Digital signals, the PCM signals will be automatically output even when you select “Dolby Digital.”

DTS Output (DVD VIDEOs only)

Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.

On Select this wwhen therecorder is connected to anaudio component with abuilt-in DTS decoder.
Off Select this wwhen therecorder is connected to anaudio component without abuilt-in DTS decoder.

Note

When HDMI output is performed to equipment not compatible with DTS signals, the signals will not be output regardless of the “DTS Output” setting.

96 kHz PCM Output (DVD VIDEOS only)

Selects the sampling frequency of the audio signal.

96 kHz ->48 kHzThe audio signals of DVD VIDEOs are converted to 48 kHz and output.
96 kHz All signals containing96 kHz are output without conversion. However, the signals are output at 48 kHz if copyright-protected signals are contained.

Notes

  • “96 kHz PCM Output” setting has no effect when audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks or LINE 3 – TV/LINE 1/DECODER jack. If the sampling frequency is 96 kHz, signals are simply converted to analogue signals and output.
  • If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with 96 kHz signals, 48 kHz PCM will be automatically output even when you select “96 kHz.”

MPEG Output (DVD VIDEOS only)

Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.

MPEG Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built-in MPEG decoder.
MPEG -> PCMSelect this when the recorder is connected to an audio component without a built-in MPEG decoder. If you play MPEG audio sound tracks, the recorder outputs stereo signals via the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.

Note

If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the PCM signals will be automatically output even when you select “MPEG.”

Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVDs only)

Selects the dynamic range (difference between soft and loud sounds) setting when playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio DRC.” This affects the output from the following jacks:

– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks
- LINE 3 - TV jack
- LINE 1/DECODER jack
- DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jack only when “Dolby Digital Output” is set to “Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 138).

On Makes low sounds clear even if you turn the volume down.
OffNormally select this position.

Language Settings (Language)

The “Language” setup allows you to adjust language settings.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Language," and press ENTER.

The “Language” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display Next Screen

OSD Language

Switches the display language on the screen.

Audio Language (DVD VIDEO only)

Switches the language of the sound track.

Subtitle Language (DVD VIDEO only)

Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on the disc.

Auto Language

The “Auto Language” function is available when “Audio Language” and “Subtitle Language” are set to the same language, and “Subtitle Display” is set to “On.”

On For DVD VIDEOS whose main audio track is the language you set in “Audio Language” and “Subtitle Language,” the recorder plays the main audio track without subtitles. For DVD VIDEOs whose main audio track is not the language you set in “Audio Language” and “Subtitle Language,” the recorder plays the main audio track with subtitles in the language you set.
Off Turns off the function.

DVD Menu Language (DVD VIDEO only)

Switches the language for the DVD menu. Select “w/Subtitle Language” to set the same language as the language you set in “Subtitle Language.”

Subtitle Display

OnDisplays subtitles.
Off Does not display subtitles.
Assist SubtitleDisplays special assistive subtitles, where available.

Hint

If you select “Others” in “Audio Language,” “Subtitle Language,” or “DVD Menu Language,” press ↓, and enter a language code from “Language Code List” on page 167.

Note

If you select a language in “DVD Menu Language,” “Subtitle Language,” or “Audio Language” that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected.

Recording Settings (Recording)

The "Recording" setup allows you to adjust recording settings.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Recording," and press ENTER.

The “Recording” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Manual Rec. Mode Rec. Mode Adjust Subtitle Recording Set Thumbnail Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) Auto Chapter (Video) Auto Chapter (DVD+R+/RW) HDD Recording Format On (go to setup) ■ Off

Manual Rec. Mode

On (go to setup)Allows you to select all recording modes.Select this, and press ENTER.Then, select a recording mode using ←/→, and press ENTER.
OffAllows you to select standard recording modes only.

◆ Manual recording mode

The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents.

The recording time for the HDD

Recording modeApprox. recording time (hours)
RDR-HXD770RDR-HXD870RDR-HXD970RDR-HXD1070
HQ^+^*1 17 23 36 73
PCM^*2 25 34 53 105
MN32 (HQ)25 34 53 105
MN31 27 36 57 115
MN30 29 39 61 120
MN29 31 42 66 130
MN28 33 45 70 140
MN27 36 48 75 150
MN26 (HSP)37 50 79 155
MN25 39 53 84 165
MN24 42 56 88 175
MN23 44 59 92 185
MN22 46 62 97 195
MN21 (SP)51 68 105 210
MN20 54 73 115 230
MN19 59 79 120 245
MN18 (LSP)63 84 130 265
MN17 67 90 140 280
MN16 72 96 150 300
MN15 (ESP)75 100 155 315
MN14 78 105 165 335
MN13 82 110 175 350
MN12 86 115 185 370
MN11 90 120 190 390
MN10 93 125 200 405
MN9 (LP)100 135 210 420
MN8 110 150 235 475
MN7 120165265530
MN6 (EP)150200315635
MN5 175235370745
MN4 (SLP)200270425850
MN3 (SEP)2553405301060
MN2 3004056351275
MN1 3404557101420

The recording time for DVDs

*1 Records in higher quality (15 Mbps). HQ+ mode is not available for DVDs. When recording to DVDs, the recording mode automatically switches to HQ mode even if you set to HQ+ mode.

*2 Audio signals are recorded in 48kHz PCM format, and video signals are recorded in HQ mode. When recording a bilingual programme, select the sound to be recorded (page 138).

*3 Titles recorded in MN6 or lower mode cannot be dubbed to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs at high speed.

*4 SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode is not available for DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R DLs. When recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the recording mode automatically switches to SLP mode even if you set to SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode.

Hint

Audio signals are recorded in Dolby Digital 2 ch format (except for PCM mode).

◆Resolution

The first figure refers to when “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC”; the second when set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup (page 130).

For the HDD ("HDD Recording Format" is set to "Video Mode Off")/DVD-RW (VR mode)/DVD-R (VR mode)

HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN16: 720 × 480 / 720 × 576

MN15 to MN12: 544 × 480 / 544 × 576

MN11 to MN9: 480 × 480 / 544 × 576

MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576

MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288

For the HDD ("HDD Recording Format" is set to "Video Mode On")/DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)

HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN9: 720 × 480 / 720 × 576

MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576

MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288

Rec. Mode Adjust

On Automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded (page 74).
Off Turns off the function.

Subtitle Recording

On Records digital subtitles.
Off No digital broadcast subtitles are recorded.

Set Thumbnail

Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture shown in the Title List.

0 seconds The first frame of the title is set for the thumbnail picture.
30 seconds The frame at 30 seconds from the first frame is set for the thumbnail picture.
3 minutes The frame at 3 minutes from the first frame is set for the thumbnail picture.

Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) (HDD/DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode only)

On The recorderdetectschanges in the picture and sound and automatically inserts chapter marks (up to 99 chapters for one title recorded on the HDD).
Off No chapter mark is inserted.

Notes

  • The actual chapter mark interval may vary depending on the amount of information contained in the video to be recorded.
  • Chapter marks are automatically inserted, where the date or time information changes on the tape, when “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode).

Auto Chapter (Video) (DVD-RW/DVD-R in Video mode only)

No SeparationNo chapter mark is inserted.
10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at approximately 10-minute intervals.
15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at approximately 15-minute intervals.

Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) (DVD+RW/DVD+R only)

No SeparationNo chapter mark is inserted.
10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at approximately 10-minute intervals.
15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at approximately 15-minute intervals.

HDD Recording Format

Selects the HDD recording format.

Video Mode OffRecords to the HDD in VR mode.When recording stereo and bilingual programmes, both main and sub sounds can be recorded.
Video Mode OnRecords to the HDD in Video mode.When recording stereo and bilingual programmes, only one sound track (main or sub) can be recorded.Set “Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” (default) or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).

Hint

The HDD contents recorded in Video mode can be dubbed to a disc at high speed (page 98).

Playback Settings (Playback)

The "Playback" setup allows you to adjust the playback settings.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Playback," and press ENTER.

The “Playback” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 TV Type Pause Mode Seamless Playback Angle Indicator 4.3 Letter Box 4.3 Pen Scan ■ 16:9

TV Type

Select the playback picture size according to the type of connected TV (wide-screen/wide mode TV or conventional 4:3 screen TV).

4:3 Letter BoxSelect this when connecting to a 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen.
4:3 Pan Scan SSelect this when connecting to a 4:3 screen TV.Automatically displays a wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit.
16:9Select this when connecting to a wide-screen TV or TV with a wide mode function.

4:3 Letter Box

SONY RDR-HXD770 - TV Type - 1

4:3 Pan Scan

SONY RDR-HXD770 - TV Type - 2

natural_image Simple line drawing of a mountain landscape with a river and trees (no text or symbols)

16:9

SONY RDR-HXD770 - TV Type - 3

natural_image Simple line drawing of a mountain landscape with trees and a river (no text or symbols)

Note

Depending on the disc, "4:3 Letter Box" may be selected automatically instead of "4:3 Pan Scan" or vice-versa.

Pause Mode

Selects the picture quality in pause mode.

Field Outputs astable, generally shake-free image.
Frame Outputsa sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto Outputs agenerally less sharp but more stable still image.

Seamless Playback (HDD/DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode only)

On Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points.
Off You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Playlist.

Angle Indicator (DVD VIDEOS only)

On Displays “ ”on the TV [3×DW] screen if various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the disc.
Off Does not display “ ” on the TV screen.

Limitation Settings (Parental Lock)

The "Parental Lock" setup allows you to set the password and limit the operations.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Parental Lock," and press ENTER.

The “Parental Lock” setup display appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined. To turn off the display, press SYSTEM MENU.

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 Set Password DVD Playback D.TV Age Limit Next Screen

Set Password/Change Password

You can set or change the password that gives access to the “Channel Options” settings in the “Digital Tuner” setup and the “Parental Lock” settings.

1 Select "Set Password" or "Change Password" in "Parental Lock," and press ENTER.

2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER. The display for registering a password appears.

Example: when you select "Set Password" in step 1

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 Set Pa DVD P D.TV A Set Password

3 Enter your four-digit password using the number buttons, and press ENTER.

- To change the password, enter your four-digit password in the “Current Password” row using the number buttons, and press ENTER. Then enter a new password in the “New Password” row using the number buttons.

The password setting/password changing setting is completed.

Note

If you forgot your password, reset the recorder (page 158).

DVD Playback (DVD VIDEO only)

Playback of some DVD VIDEOS can be limited according to a predetermined level, such as the age of the users. Scenes may be blocked or replaced with different scenes.

1 Select "DVD Playback" in "Parental Lock," and press ENTER.

To register a new password, see "Set Password/Change Password" on page 145.

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 Change Password DVD Playback D.TV Age Limit Change Level Standard

2 Select "Standard," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 Change DVD P 0.TV A Parental Control : Standard Password Code US Number 2 1 1 9

3 Enter your four-digit password using the number buttons, and press ENTER.

4 Select "Code" (geographic area) as the playback limitation level, and press ENTER.

The area is selected.

- When you select "Number," press the number buttons to select and enter a country/area code in the table (page 168), and press ENTER.

5 Select "Change Level," and press ENTER.

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 Change DVD P D.TV A Parental Control : Change Level Password Off

6 Enter your four-digit password using the number buttons, and press ENTER.

7 Select the level.

The lower the value, the stricter the limitation.

Discs rated higher than the selected level will be restricted.

8 Press ENTER.

The DVD Playback setting is completed. To cancel the DVD Playback setting for the disc, select "Off" in step 7.

D.TV Age Limit

Viewing of some digital TV programmes can be limited according to the age limit you set. To watch programmes that exceed the age limit you set, your password is required. (for customers in France/Denmark/Finland, or Sweden only)

1 Select "D.TV Age Limit" in "Parental Lock," and press ENTER.

2 Select "Next Screen," and press ENTER. The "D.TV Age Limit" display appears.

3 Enter your four-digit password using the number buttons, and press ENTER.

4 Select an age as limitation level, and press ENTER.

The setting is completed.

To cancel the setting, select "Off."

HDMI Settings (HDMI Output)

The “HDMI Output” setup allows you to adjust items related to the HDMI connection. You can select “HDMI Output” only when connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT jack.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "HDMI Output," and press ENTER.

The “HDMI Output” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

After connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT jack, “Screen Resolution,” “4:3 Video Output,” and “Colour” are automatically set to the appropriate settings.

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 Screen Resolution 4.3 Video Output Colour Audio Output HDMI Control 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080i 1280 x 720p 720 x 576p 720 x 576i

Screen Resolution

Selects the type of video signals output from the HDMI OUT jack. If the picture is not clear, natural or to your satisfaction, try another option that suits the disc and your TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to the instruction manual supplied with the TV/projector, etc.

1920 x 1080p Sends 1920×1080p video signals.
1920 x 1080i Sends 1920×1080i video signals.
1280 x 720p Sends 1280×720p video signals.
720 x 576p*1Sends 720×576p video signals.
720 x 480p*2Sends 720×480p video signals.
720 x 576i*1Sends 720×576i video signals.
720 x 480i*2Sends 720×480i video signals.

*1 Can be selected only when "Input Line System" is set to "PAL/SECAM" in the "Basic" setup (page 130).
*2 Can be selected only when "Input Line System" is set to "NTSC" in the "Basic" setup (page 130).

Notes

  • When picture noise appears after you change the "Screen Resolution" setting, hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder, and press ▲ (open/close) on the recorder.
  • When “Colour” is set to “YCbCr 4:2:2” in the “HDMI Output” setup, you cannot select “720 x 576i” (or “720 x 480i”).

4:3 Video Output

This setting is effective only when you set "TV Type" to "16:9" in the "Playback" setup. Adjust this setting to watch 4:3 aspect ratio signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on your TV, change the setting on your TV, not this recorder.

Note that this setting is effective only for HDMI connection.

Full Select this when you can change the aspect ratio on your TV.
Normal Select this when you cannot change the aspect ratio on your TV. Shows a 4:3 size video with the aspect ratio as it is.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - 4:3 Video Output - 1

natural_image Simple diagram of five circles arranged in a 2x2 grid within a rectangle (no text or symbols)

16:9 aspect ratio TV

Colour

Selects the method of outputting video signals for the HDMI jack.

RGB (0-255) Outputs RGB (0-255) signals. Select this when connecting to an RGB (0-255) device.
RGB (16-235) Outputs RGB (16-235) signals. Select this if colours appear overly rich and the black appears too deep.
YCbCr 4:2:2 Outputs 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2 component signals.
YCbCr 4:4:4 Outputs 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4 component signals.

Notes

  • Some settings may not be available depending on the connected device.
  • When a DVI device is connected, you cannot select "YCbCr 4:2:2" or "YCbCr 4:4:4."
  • When “Screen Resolution” is set to “720 x 576i” (or “720 x 480i”) in the “HDMI Output” setup, you cannot select “YCbCr 4:2:2.”

Audio Output

Selects the type of audio signal output from the HDMI OUT jack.

AutoOutputs Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS audio signals as a bitstream signal. Normally select this position.
PCM Converts allaudio signals except for DTS signals to PCM.
Bitstream PrioritySelect this if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio.

Notes

  • The PCM signals may not be output even when you select “Auto” depending on the “Audio Out” settings, number of audio channels, and the HDMI-connected device.
  • The “Audio Output” function is not available when a DVI device is connected.

HDMI Control

On Allows you to use the HDMI control features (page 21).
OffTurns off the function.

Other Settings (Options)

The “Options” and “Options 2” setups allow you to set up other operational settings.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select "Initial Setup," and press ENTER.
3 Select "Options" or "Options 2," and press ENTER.

The “Options” or “Options 2” setup appears with the following options. The default settings are underlined.

Example: "Options" setup

Initial Setup Playback Parental Lock HDMI Output Options Options 2 On Screen Display Front Panel Display Command Mode SMARTLINK DivX Set Preview Software Update ■ On Off

Options

On Screen Display

On Automatically displays information on the screen when the recorder is turned on, etc.
Off Displays information only when DISPLAY is pressed.

Front Panel Display

Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.

OnBright lighting.
Off Turns off thelighting when the power is off.

Command Mode

Changes the Command Mode of the recorder to avoid interference with your other Sony DVD recorder or player.

1 Select "Command Mode" in "Options," and press ENTER.
2 Select a Command Mode (DVD1, DVD2, or DVD3), and press ENTER.

Note

The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3. The remote does not function if different command modes are set for the recorder and remote. Set the same command mode.

3 Set the Command Mode for the remote so it matches the Command Mode for the recorder you set above.

Follow the steps below to set the Command Mode on the remote.

①Hold down ENTER.
②While holding down ENTER, enter the Command Mode code number using the number buttons.

Command Mode Code number

DVD1 number button 1
DVD2 number button 2
DVD3 number button 3

③Hold down both the number and ENTER buttons at the same time for more than three seconds.

Hint

You can check the Command Mode for the recorder in the front panel display.

Command ModeIn the front panel display
DVD1 “1” appears.
DVD2 “2” appears.
DVD3 Either “1” or “2” does not appear.

SMARTLINK

This Recorder OnlyAllows you to use the SMARTLINK function with the recorder when the recorder is in standby mode.
Pass ThroughAllows you to use the SMARTLINK function with the connected equipment when the recorder is in standby mode.

Note

Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the “Basic” setup (page 130) to set “SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through.”

DivX

◆ Registration Code

Displays the registration code of DivX video files for this recorder.

For more information, go to http://www.divx.com/vod on the Internet.

Set Preview (HDD only)

Selects the thumbnail type shown in the Title List.

QuickPreviewPlays short excerpts from throughout the selected title.
Normal Plays theselected title from the beginning.

Software Update

You can check the current software version of the built-in digital tuner and keep it up to date with the latest software.

◆ Manual Update

Updates the software manually.

1 Select "Software Update" in "Options," and press ENTER.
2 Press "Next Screen" and press ENTER.
3 Select "Start," and press ENTER.
4 Select "Yes," and press ENTER. The update starts.

To cancel, press SYSTEM MENU.

The new software will be available next time the recorder is turned on.

Auto Update

On Updates the software automatically. Normally, select this position.
Off Does not update the software automatically.

◆ Technical Info.

You can check the current hardware and software versions of the digital tuner.

Options 2

USB

◆ Restart USB Device

Restarts the connected USB device if it does not respond to the recorder. If the connected USB device still does not work properly, try following:

  • Turn the connected USB device off and on again.
  • Disconnect and then connect the USB cable.

◆ Confirm Printer

Displays the manufacturer and model name of the printer connected to the recorder. Note that this function may not work depending on the printer.

TV Pause

Selects the tuner for the TV Pause (page 87).

TV's Tuner Selects this when connecting the recorder to your TV using the SCART jack.
Recorder's TunerSelects this when connecting the recorder to your TV not using the SCART jack.

Additional Information

Troubleshooting

If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the recorder, use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer.

Power

The power does not turn on.

→ Check that the mains lead is connected securely.

Tuner

The channel is not found or stored or missed.

→ Make sure that your aerial is properly connected to the recorder.
→ Confirm with your dealer that you are in an area that can receive a digital signal.
→ Check your aerial installation.

Picture

There is no picture.

→ Re-connect all connecting cords securely.
→ The connecting cords are damaged.
→ Check the connection to your TV (page 15).
→ Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to “VCR” and “AV 1”) so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen.
→ Check that the “Video In/Out” setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system (page 136).

→ If you connect the recorder to your TV via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set “Component Video Out” in the “Video In/Out” setup to “Progressive” (page 136).

→ A scrambled channel is selected.

→ When playing a double-layer DVD, the video and audio may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch.

Picture noise appears.

If the picture output signal from your recorder passes through your VCR to get to your TV, or if you are connected to a combination TV/VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal applied to some DVD programmes could affect picture quality. If you still experience this problem even when you connect your recorder directly to your TV, try connecting your recorder to your TV's S VIDEO input.
→ You have set the recorder to progressive format even though your TV cannot accept the progressive signal. In this case, hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder, and press ▲ (open/close) on the recorder.
Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format (525p/625p) signals, the image may be affected when you set the recorder to progressive format. In this case, hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder, and press ▲ (open/close) on the unit and the recorder is set to normal (interlace) format.
→ You are playing a title recorded in a colour system that is different from your TV.
→ Noise may appear in the pictures recorded on the HDD, which is due to the characteristics of HDD, and is not a malfunction.
→ When playing a double-layer DVD, the video and audio may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch.

There is no picture or picture noise appears when connected to the DV IN jack.

→ Try the following: ①Turn the recorder off and on again. ②Turn the connected equipment off and on again. ③Disconnect and then connect the i.LINK cable again.

There is no picture or picture noise appears when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

→ Try the following: ①Turn the recorder off and on again. ②Turn the connected equipment off and on again. ③Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cord again.

If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video output, changing the “Screen Resolution” setting in the “HDMI Output” setup may solve the problem (page 147). Connect the TV and the recorder using a video jack other than HDMI OUT, and switch the TV’s input to the connected video input so that you can see the on-screen displays. Change the “Screen Resolution” setting in the “HDMI Output” setup, and switch the TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture still does not appear, repeat the steps and try other options.
→ The recorder is connected to an input device that is not HDCP compliant (page 19).
→ When picture noise appears after you change the “Screen Resolution” setting, hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder, and press ▲ (open/close) on the recorder.

TV programme reception does not fill the screen.

→ Set the channel manually in “Manual CH Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup (page 133).
→ Select the correct source using the INPUT button, or select a channel of any TV programme using the PROG +/- buttons.

The picture is breaking up.

→ The signal strength is low.
→ Check aerial installation.

TV programme pictures are distorted.

→ Reorient the TV aerial.
→ Adjust the picture (see the TV's instruction manual).
→ Place the recorder and TV farther apart.
→ Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables farther apart.
→ The aerial cable is connected to the AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder. Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack.
The recorder's colour system is different from your TV. Hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder to change the recorder's colour system.

TV channels cannot be changed.

→ The channel is skipped (page 134).
→ A timer recording started, which changed the channels.
→ The Parental Lock is activated (page 145).

The picture from equipment connected to the recorder's input jack does not appear on the screen.

→ If the equipment is connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack, select "L1" in the front panel display by pressing INPUT. If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN jacks, select "L2" in the front panel display by pressing INPUT.

The playback picture or TV programme from the equipment connected through the recorder is distorted.

→ If the playback picture output from a DVD player, VCR, or tuner goes through your recorder before reaching your TV, the copy-protection signal applied to some programmes could affect picture quality. Disconnect the playback equipment in question and connect it directly to your TV.

The picture does not fill the screen.

→ Set “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup in accordance with the screen size of your TV (page 144).

The picture does not fill the screen, even though the picture size is set in “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup.

→ The picture size of the title is fixed.

The picture is black and white.

→ Check that “LINE 3 Out” in the “Video In/Out” setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system (page 136).
→ If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to use one that is fully wired (21 pins).

GUIDE Plus+ system (in the UK only)

GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.

①Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV programme listings do not appear until the recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.
②Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug it. ③Wait for 24 hours. It may take several days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE Plus+ data for all programme positions. If the recorder does not receive the GUIDE Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host channel manually (page 69).

→ The country/region or postal code is incorrect. Correctly set your country/region and postal code (page 26).

→ When the recorder is connected to a set top box receiver, the set top box receiver must be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus+ data.

Area numbers that cannot be received using GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in the System Menu, and follow the on-screen instructions to make the settings again (page 26).

→ The “Time Lock” function on your cable box is activated. Set this function to off.

If the host channel has changed or moved, the programme guide data cannot be received. In this case, follow the steps in “Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host channel” (page 68) to update the host channel setting. If the problem persists after waiting for one day, search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually (page 69).

www.europe.guideplus.com

The programme position number in the programme listing does not match the broadcast station.

→ There may be more than one channel lineup for your area. To change the channel lineup, select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the GUIDE Plus+ system (page 69).

Programme listings for some programme positions are missing.

→ The programme guide data may not be updated. Turn off the recorder and let the recorder receive the programme guide data.
→ Some broadcast stations support only two days of data. For details, see the following website: www.europe.guideplus.com
→ All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be received because the reception is poor.

The programme listing is not up to date.

The recorder was in use during the time that the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled to be downloaded.

→ All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be received because the reception is poor.

Sound

There is no sound.

→ Re-connect all connections securely.
→ The connecting cord is damaged.
→ The input source setting on the audio component or the connection to the audio component is incorrect.
→ The recorder is in reverse play, fast-forward, slow motion, or pause mode.
→ If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jacks, check the “Audio Out” setup (page 138).
The recorder supports only MP3 audio, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX video files. Press AUDIO and select MP3 audio or MPEG audio.

No sound is output from the HDMI OUT jack.

→ Try the following: ①Turn the recorder off and on again. ②Turn the connected equipment off and on again. ③Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cord again.
→ The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI device (DVI jacks do not accept audio signals).
The equipment connected to the HDMI OUT jack does not conform to the audio signal format. In this case, set “Audio Output” to “PCM” in the “HDMI Output” setup (page 148).

Sound distortion occurs.

→ Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio In” setup to “Compression” (page 137).

Sound is noisy.

→ When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks, noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 3 – TV jack, or LINE 1/DECODER jack (page 109).

The sound volume is low.

The sound volume is low on some DVDs. The sound volume may improve if you set “Audio DRC” in the “Audio Out” setup to “On” (page 139).
→ Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio In” setup to “Normal” (page 137).

An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or played.

→ When recording from connected equipment, set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).
→ Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot be recorded on the HDD (when Video Mode On) DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode). To record the language, set “Bilingual Recording” in the “Audio In” setup to “A/L” or “B/R” before recording (page 138). To record both the main and sub sounds on a disc, record on DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode). To record on the HDD, set “HDD Recording Format” to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” setup (page 144).
→ If you have connected an audio component to the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack and want to change the audio track for the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) during playback, set “Dolby Digital Output” in the “Audio Out” setup to “Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 138).

The sound is breaking up.

→ The signal strength is low.
→ Check aerial installation.

Playback

The recorder does not play any type of disc (except HDD).

→ The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labelled side facing up.
→ The disc is not correctly inserted.
→ Moisture has condensed inside the recorder. In this case, if the recorder is on, leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about an hour until the moisture evaporates.
→ If the disc was recorded on another recorder and was not finalised (page 45), the recorder cannot play the disc.

The recorder does not start playback from the beginning.

→ Resume play was activated (page 81).
→ You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu or DVD menu automatically appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted. Use the menu to start playback.

The recorder starts playing automatically.

→ The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback function.

Playback stops automatically.

→ If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the recorder stops playback at the auto pause signal.

Some functions such as Stop, Search, or Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.

→ Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to do some of the operations above. See the instruction manual supplied with the disc.

The language for the sound track cannot be changed.

→ Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played.
→ The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track.
Try changing the language using the DVD VIDEO's menu.

The subtitle language cannot be changed or turned off.

→ Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO.
→ The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the subtitles.
Try changing the subtitle using the DVD VIDEO's menu.
→ The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder.

The angles cannot be changed.

→ Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO being played.
→ You are trying to change the angles when “does not appear on the TV screen (page 80). To display “If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the disc, set “Angle Indicator” to “On” in the “Playback” setup (page 145).
→ The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles.
→ Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO's menu.
→ The angles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder.
→ The angles cannot be changed during slow motion playback or when playback is paused.

The DivX video files do not play.

→ The file is not created in DivX format.
→ The file has an extension other than “.avi” or “.divx.”
→ The DATA CD (DivX video)/DATA DVD (DivX video) is not created in a DivX format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, 2.00, or 2.01.
→ The DivX video file format is larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height).

The MP3 audio tracks do not play.

→ The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a format that the recorder can play (page 161).

The JPEG image files do not play.

→ The JPEG image files are not recorded in a format that the recorder can play (page 161).
→ Progressive JPEG images cannot be played.

TV Pause does not work.

→ You are recording to the HDD or the HDD is full.

Recording/Timer recording/Editing

The programme position cannot be changed from the programme position you are recording.

→ Set the TV's input source to "TV."

Recording does not start immediately after you press ● REC.

→ Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,” “FORMAT,” or “INFO WRITE” disappears from the front panel display.

Nothing was recorded even though you set the timer setting correctly.

→ There was a power failure during recording.
The recorder's internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the clock (page 129).
→ The channel was disabled after the timer recording was set. See “Manual CH Setting” on page 133.
The programme position was hidden after the timer recording was set. (See “Disabling programme positions” on page 70.)
→ Disconnect the mains lead from the mains, and connect it again.
→ The programme contains copy protection signals that restrict copying.
→ Another timer setting overlapped the timer setting (page 60, 78).
→ There is no DVD inside the recorder.
→ There is not enough disc space for the recording.
→ The set top box receiver was turned off.
→ The set top box controller was incorrectly connected (page 15).
→ The settings in “Setup” in the Menu bar have been changed (page 68).
→ The recorder was in the process of dubbing.
→ A scrambled channel is selected.
→ The channel activated Parental Lock is selected (page 146).

Recording does not stop immediately after you press ■ REC STOP.

→ It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input disc data before recording can stop. On-screen instructions may appear after pressing ■ REC STOP. In this case, follow the on-screen instructions.

Recording does not stop after you press

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Recording does not stop after you press - 1

→ Press ■ REC STOP.

Timer recording is not complete or did not start from the beginning.

→ There was a power failure during recording. If the power recovers when there is a timer recording, the recorder resumes recording. Should the power failure continue for more than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 129).
→ Another timer setting overlapped the timer setting (page 60, 78).
→ Disc space was not sufficient.
→ The VPS/PDC function is working.

Contents previously recorded were erased.

→ Data that is not playable on this recorder but was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be erased from the disc when the disc is inserted.

The VPS/PDC function does not operate.

→ Check that the clock and date are set correctly.
→ Check that the VPS/PDC time you set is correct (there might be a mistake in the TV programme guide). If the broadcast you wanted to record did not send the correct VPS/PDC information, the recorder will not start recording.
→ If the reception is poor, the VPS/PDC signal might be altered and the recorder might not start recording.
→ The VPS/PDC function may not work if the GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not complete.
→ The VPS/PDC function does not work when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded.

Dubbing

You dubbed a title, but the title did not appear in the HDD Title List.

→ The title contained a copy protection signal, so it was moved (page 99).

High-speed dubbing is not possible.

→ The title cannot be dubbed at high speed (page 100). Even if A-B erasure is performed so that a title does not contain mixed picture sizes, it is still treated as a title with mixed picture sizes.

HDD/DVD Dubbing is not possible.

→ The title cannot be dubbed (page 99).

Display

The clock has stopped.

→ Set the clock again (page 129).
→ The clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the clock (page 129).

The timer indicator is flashing.

→ The disc does not have enough space.
→ Insert a recordable disc into the recorder.
→ The inserted DVD is protected (page 44).

The clock does not appear in the front panel display when the recorder is turned off.

→ “Front Panel Display” is set to “Off” in the “Options” setup (page 149).

Remote control

The remote does not function.

→ Different command modes are set for the recorder and remote. Set the same command mode (page 149). The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3. You can check the current command mode in the front panel display (page 149).

→ The batteries are weak. → The remote is too far from the recorder.

The remote's manufacturer code returned to the default setting when you replaced the batteries. Reset the code (page 24).
→ The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the recorder.

Others

The recorder does not detect a USB device connected to the recorder.

→ Make sure that the USB device is securely connected to the recorder (page 126).
→ Check if the USB device or a cable is damaged.
→ Check if the USB device is on.

Display language on the screen switches automatically.

When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the “HDMI Output” setup (page 148), the display language on the screen automatically switches, according to the language setting of the connected TV, if you change the language settings on your TV, etc.

The recorder does not operate properly.

→ Press down I/⏻ on the recorder for more than five seconds until the recorder turns off. Then, press I/⏻ again to turn on the recorder.
When static electricity, etc., causes the recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the recorder and wait until the clock appears in the front panel display. Then, unplug the recorder and after leaving it off for a while, plug it in again.

The disc tray does not open after you press ▲ (open/close).

→ It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have recorded or edited a DVD. This is because the recorder is adding disc data to the disc.

Any buttons do not function and "LOCKED" appears in the front panel display.

→ The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child Lock (page 81, 108).

The disc tray does not open and "TRAYLOCKED" appears in the front panel display.

→ Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

"REPAIR" appears in the front panel display.

The recorder's repair function is activated to repair the hard disk drive or disc when the recorder is turned on after a power failure has occurred during recorder operation, such as while recording, or when some errors have occurred. Leave the recorder on until “REPAIR” disappears from the front panel display.

"E01" appears in the front panel display.

→ There is a problem in the HDD. Contact your nearest Sony dealer. Note that contents on the HDD may be erased when servicing this unit.

"E02" appears in the front panel display.

→ A hard disk error has occurred and you cannot make a new recording to the HDD. Press and hold I/☐ on the recorder for more than five seconds to turn the recorder off, then turn it on again. If “E02” still appears, format the HDD following the instructions of “Format HDD.” (page 128). Note that all of the recorded contents on the HDD will be erased. If this does not fix the problem, contact your nearest Sony dealer.

"HDCP\_ERR" appears in the front panel display.

The recorder is connected to an input device that is not HDCP compliant. Connect the equipment that is HDCP compliant (page 19). Disregard this error message if the output picture is displayed correctly.

The Parental Lock does not work.

→ Check the “D.TV Age Limit” setting in the “Parental Lock” setup (page 146).

Mechanical sounds are heard when the recorder is off.

→ While the recorder is updating the EPG information, operational noises (such as the internal fan) may be heard, even when the power is off. This is not a malfunction.

→ While the recorder is adjusting the clock for the Auto Clock Set function or updating the EPG information, operational noises may be heard, even when the power is off. This is not a malfunction.

Resetting the Recorder

You can reset the recorder to all its factory settings.

1 Make sure that the recorder is turned on and remove the disc.

2 Hold down ■ (stop) on the recorder and press I/⏻ on the recorder.

All settings are reset and the recorder turns off.

Notes About This Recorder

On operation

  • If the recorder is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, or is placed in a very damp room, moisture may condense on the lenses inside the recorder. Should this occur, the recorder may not operate properly. In this case, if the recorder is on, leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about an hour until the moisture evaporates.
  • When you move the recorder, take out any discs and do not apply shock or vibration to the hard disk drive to avoid damaging the disc or hard disk drive (page 3).

On adjusting volume

Do not turn up the volume while listening to a section with very low level inputs or no audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be damaged when a peak level section is played.

On cleaning

Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or benzine.

On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens cleaners (including wet or spray types). These may cause the recorder to malfunction.

Notes about the discs

• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust, fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may cause it to malfunction.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Notes about the discs - 1

natural_image Illustration of hands holding a circular object with a handle (no text or symbols)

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Notes about the discs - 2

  • Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car.
    • After playing, store the disc in its case.
  • Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the centre out.

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Notes about the discs - 3

  • Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
  • Do not use the following discs.
    – A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g., card, heart).
  • A disc with a label or sticker on it.
  • A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker adhesive on it.

On replacement of parts

In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired parts may be collected for reuse or recycling purposes.

Specifications

System

Laser: Semiconductor laser

Transmission standards (Digital broadcasting): DVB-T

Channel coverage (Digital broadcasting):

VHF: E5 to E12, F5 to F10, Italian D to H2

UHF: E21 to E69, B21 to B68, F21 to F69

Channel coverage (Analogue broadcasting):

PAL (B/G, D/K, I)/SECAM (L)

VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10, Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South Africa 4 to 11, 13

UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to B69, F21 to F69

CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France B to Q

HYPER: S21 to S41

The above channel coverage merely ensures the channel reception within these ranges. It does not guarantee the ability to receive signals in all circumstances. For details, see “Receivable channels” (page 135).

Video reception: Frequency synthesizer system

Audio reception: Split carrier system

Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial socket

Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/Power back-up duration: 1 hour

Video recording format: MPEG-2, MPEG-1

Audio recording format/applicable

bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch 256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and SEP mode), PCM

Inputs and outputs

LINE 2 OUT

(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms

(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p

(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)

LINE 2 IN

(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than 22 kilohms

(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p

(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)

LINE 3 - TV: 21-pin

CVBS OUT

S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)

LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin

CVBS IN/OUT

S-Video/RGB IN

Decoder

DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100

DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

USB jack Type A (For connecting digital still camera, Memory card reader and USB memory)

USB jack Type B (For connecting

PictBridge-compatible printers)

General

Power requirements: 220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption: 49 W

Dimensions (approx.):

430 × 76.5 × 286 mm (width/height/depth) incl. projecting parts

Hard disk drive capacity:

RDR-HXD770: 120 GB

RDR-HXD870: 160 GB

RDR-HXD970: 250 GB

RDR-HXD1070: 500 GB

Mass (approx.): 4.7 kg

Operating temperature: 5°C to 35°C

Operating humidity: 25% to 80%

Supplied accessories:

Mains lead (1)

Aerial cable (1)

Remote commander (remote) (1)

Set top box controller (1)

R6 (size AA) batteries (2)

Specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files, and DivX Video Files

About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video files

MP3 is an audio compression technology that satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations.

JPEG is an image compression technology. You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) format audio tracks and JPEG image files on the HDD or DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) or JPEG image files on the HDD or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs).

DivX ^® is a video file compression technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This product is an official DivX ^® Certified product. You can play DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) and DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs) that contain DivX video files. DATA DVDs must be recorded according to ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, 2.00*, or 2.01 format for the recorder to recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video files.

DATA CDs must be recorded according to ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet format for the recorder to recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video files.

You can also play discs recorded in MultiSession/Border.

See the instructions supplied with the disc drives and the recording software (not supplied) for details on the recording format.

* Not available for MP3 audio tracks.

Note on MultiSession/Border discs

If audio tracks and images in Music CD format or Video CD format are recorded in the first session/border, only the first session/border will be played back.

MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image files, or DivX video files that the recorder can play

The recorder can play the following tracks and files:

  • MP3 audio tracks with the extension ".mp3."
  • JPEG image files with the extension “.jpeg” or “.jpg.”
    – Baseline JPEG image files that conform to the Exif 2.2* image files format, and Y:C B :C R is 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0.
  • DivX video files with the extension “.avi” or “.divx.”
    * "Exchangeable Image File Format": The file format used by digital still cameras.

Hint

Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start playback, it is recommended that you create albums with no more than two trees.

Notes

  • The recorder will play any data with the extension “.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or “.divx” even if they are not in MP3, JPEG, or DivX format. Playing these data may generate a loud noise which could damage your speaker system.
  • Depending on the disc, normal playback may not be possible. For example, the picture may be unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the sound may skip, and so on.
  • Depending on the disc, playback may take some time to start.
  • Some files cannot be played.
  • For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files, the recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to 99 tracks and files under an album can be played.
  • For JPEG image files, the recorder can load up to 99 albums and/or up to 999 files under an album on a DATA CD/DATA DVD or the connected USB device at a time. To view unloaded albums, reload them.
  • Proceeding to the next or another album may take some time.
  • The image size that can be displayed is limited. The following image sizes can be displayed: width 160–5,120 pixels by height 120–3,840 pixels.
  • This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
  • No more than a 1 GB MP3 audio track can be played.

  • The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in mp3PRO format.

  • The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of a size larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/4 GB.
  • The recorder may not play a DivX video file when the file has been combined from two or more DivX video files.

Notes on copying JPEG image files/MP3 audio tracks

- You cannot copy JPEG image files/MP3 audio tracks to the HDD if:

  • The total number of JPEG image albums on the HDD exceeds 999.
  • The total number of JPEG image files/MP3 audio tracks under an album exceeds 999.
    – The MP3 audio tracks are 1 GB or larger.

  • Note that the size of JPEG image files copied to the HDD may be automatically increased to fit the TV screen.

  • You cannot copy JPEG image files onto a DATA DVD finalised on other recorders or devices.
  • If a warning message indicating that the HDD is full appears, erase several albums or files to make space. For details on erasing tracks or files, see page 117 or 125.

The DV IN jack on this recorder is i.LINK-compliant for digital video cameras. This section describes the i.LINK standard and its features.

i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling other equipment.

i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment. When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this recorder in a daisy chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that this recorder is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected equipment.

Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.

Note

Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable). When connecting this recorder to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), see the instruction manual of the equipment to be connected.

i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a trademark approved by many corporations. IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

i.LINK's maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are defined:

S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)

S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)

S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)

The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the instruction manual of each equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment.

The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is "S100."

When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.

* What is Mbps?

Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in one second.

For details on how to dub when this recorder is connected to other video equipment having DV jacks, see page 104.

The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC-SD signals. It cannot output signals.

The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV signals from equipment such as a MICRO MV digital video camera with an i.LINK jack.

For further precautions, see the notes on page 104.

For details on precautions when connecting this recorder, also see the instruction manuals for the equipment to be connected.

Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable.

i.LINK and i are trademarks.

Guide to Parts and Controls

For more information, see the pages in parentheses.

Remote

1 3 5 7 9 11 14 16 19 21 22 23 25 27 29 31 2 4 6 8 10 12 13 15 17 18 20 22 23 24 26 28 30 32

1 HDD button (36) DVD button (36)
2I/ (on/standby) button (26)
3 ▲ (open/close) button (36)
4 PROG (programme) +/- buttons (36) The + button has a tactile dot*.
5 Number buttons (42, 89) The number 5 button has a tactile dot*.
6 INPUT (input select) button (61, 79)
7 AUDIO button (82, 108) The AUDIO button has a tactile dot*.
8 CLEAR button (42, 84, 109, 110)
9 ANGLE button (80, 125)

10 TV/DVD button (24)
11 SUBTITLE button (82)
12 (text) button (51)
13 MENU button (80)
14Colour buttons (48, 65)
15 SYSTEM MENU button (76, 85, 100, 106, 112, 118, 128) TITLE LIST button (38, 80, 92) TOP MENU button (80) GUIDE button (48, 63)
16 TIMER button (53, 60)
17 INFO (information) button (48, 63)
18 ←/↑/↓/→/ENTER button (26)
19 RETURN button (26) EXIT button (131)
20DISPLAY button (40)
21/ (instant replay/instant advance) buttons (82)
22 ◀◀/▶▶ (previous/next) buttons (82, 108, 115) PAGE +/- buttons (48, 65)
23 ◀◀◀◀◀◀/▶▶▶▶ (search/slow/freeze frame) buttons (82, 108, 115) DAY +/- buttons (65)
24 ▷ (play) button (80, 108, 124) ■ (pause) button (82, 108, 115, 124) ■ (stop) button (80, 108, 114, 124) The ▷ button has a tactile dot*.
25 TV PAUSE button (87)
26 ● REC button (36) ■ REC STOP button (36) HDD/DVD DUB button (99) REC MODE button (36)
27 ZOOM button (124) 28 TV I/ ^① (on/standby) button (24)

29 PLAY MODE button (84, 89, 109, 111)

30 TV → (input select) button (24)

31TV △ (volume) +/- buttons (24)

32 TV PROG (programme) +/- buttons (24)

The + button has a tactile dot*.

* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the recorder.

Front panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 17 16 i 15 14 13 12 11

1 I/ (on/standby) button (26)
2 (remote sensor) (24)
3Disc tray (36)
4 Front panel display (166)
5 ▲ (open/close) button (36)
6▶ (play) button (80, 108, 124)

The ▶ button has a tactile dot*.

7 ■ (stop) button (80, 108, 114, 124)
8● REC button (36)
9 ■ REC STOP button (36)
10 HDD button/indicator (36)

DVD button/indicator (36)

11PROGRAM +/- buttons (36)
The + button has a tactile dot*.
12 INPUT (input select) button (61, 79)
13LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/L(MONO) AUDIO R) jacks (32)
14 ONE-TOUCH DUB button (106)
15 DV IN jack (104)
16 USB jack (type A) (112, 118)
17PictBridge USB jack (type B) (126)

Front panel display

1 2 NTSC VPS PDC 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 RW 12

1 Displays the following:

  • Playing time
  • Current title/chapter/track/index number
    • Recording time/recording mode
  • Clock
  • Programme position
  • EPG indication (63) “EPG” appears when receiving the GUIDE Plus+ data.
  • TV Direct Rec. indication (36): "TV" appears in the right most two digits.

2 NTSC indicator (130, 137)

3 VPS/PDC indicator (78)

4 Timer indicator (73)
5Disc type Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is loaded.
Command Mode indicator (149) Displays the Command Mode of the remote. When the Command Mode for the recorder is set to DVD3 (default), either "1" or "2" does not appear.

7 Recording status

8 Dubbing direction indicator

9 Playing status

Rear panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ANAL ON AERIAL LINE 2 OUT + - + - K VISO LINE 1 / DECODDER COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 9 VERS LINE 3 - TV G-LINK DIGITAL AERIAL HORN OUT PENNSWIRE DUAL SENS CONEAL ~ AC IN 11 10 9

①ANALOG AERIAL IN/OUT jacks (15)

2LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO) jacks (19, 22)

3LINE 1/DECODER jack (31)

4G-LINK jack (17)

5 DIGITAL AERIAL IN/OUT jacks (15)

6 HDMI OUT (high-definition multimedia interface out) jack (19, 22)
⑦ DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (22)
8 AC IN terminal (23)
9LINE 3 - TV jack (19)
10LINE 2 OUT (S VIDEO) jack (19)
11 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, P_B / C_B , Pr / Cr ) jacks (19)

Language Code List

For details, see page 140.

The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.

Number Language (code)Number Language (code)Number Language (code)
0101Afar (aa)0905Interlingue (ie)1813Rhaeto-Romance (rm)
0102Abkhazian (ab)0911Inupiak (ik)1814Kirundi (rn)
0106Afrikaans (af)0914Indonesian (in)1815Romanian (ro)
0113Amharic (am)0919Icelandic (is)1821Russian (ru)
0118Arabic (ar)0920Italian (it)1823Kinyarwanda (rw)
0119Assamese (as)0923Hebrew (iw)1901Sanskrit (sa)
0125Aymara (ay)1001Japanese (ja)1904Sindhi (sd)
0126Azerbaijani (az)1009Yiddish (ji)1907Sangho (sg)
0201Bashkir (ba)1023Javanese (jw)1908Serbo-Croatian (sh)
0205Byelorussian (be)1101Georgian (ka)1909Singhalese (si)
0207Bulgarian (bg)1111Kazakh (kk)1911Slovak (sk)
0208Bihari (bh)1112Greenlandic (kl)1912Slovenian (sl)
0209Bislama (bi)1113Cambodian (km)1913Samoan (sm)
0214Bengali (bn)1114Kannada (kn)1914Shona (sn)
0215Tibetan (bo)1115Korean (ko)1915Somali (so)
0218Breton (br)1119Kashmiri (ks)1917Albanian (sq)
0301Catalan (ca)1121Kurdish (ku)1918Serbian (sr)
0315Corsican (co)1125Kirghiz (ky)1919Siswati (ss)
0319Czech (cs)1201Latin (la)1920Sesotho (st)
0325Welsh (cy)1214Lingala (ln)1921Sundanese (su)
0401Danish (da)1215Laothian (lo)1922Swedish (sv)
0405German (de)1220Lithuanian (lt)1923Swahili (sw)
0426Bhutani (dz)1222Latvian (lv); Lettish2001Tamil (ta)
0512Greek (el)1307Malagasy (mg)2005Telugu (te)
0514English (en)1309Maori (mi)2007Tajik (tg)
0515Esperanto (eo)1311Macedonian (mk)2008Thai (th)
0519Spanish (es)1312Malayalam (ml)2009Tigrinya (ti)
0520Estonian (et)1314Mongolian (mn)2011Turkmen (tk)
0521Basque (eu)1315Moldavian (mo)2012Tagalog (tl)
0601Persian (fa)1318Marathi (mr)2014Setswana (tn)
0609Finnish (fi)1319Malay (ms)2015Tonga (to)
0610Fiji (fj)1320Maltese (mt)2018Turkish (tr)
0615Faroese (fo)1325Burmese (my)2019Tsonga (ts)
0618French (fr)1401Nauru (na)2020Tatar (tt)
0625Frisian (fy)1405Nepali (ne)2023Twi (tw)
0701Irish (ga)1412Dutch (nl)2111Ukrainian (uk)
0704Scots Gaelic (gd)1415Norwegian (no)2118Urdu (ur)
0712Galician (gl)1503Occitan (oc)2126Uzbek (uz)
0714Guarani (gn)1513(Afan)Oromo (om)2209Vietnamese (vi)
0721Gujarati (gu)1518Oriya (or)2215Volapük (vo)
0801Hausa (ha)1601Panjabi (pa)2315Wolof (wo)
0809Hindi (hi)1612Polish (pl)2408Xhosa (xh)
0818Croatian (hr)1619Pashto (ps);2515Yoruba (yo)
0821Hungarian (hu)Pushto (ps)2608Chinese (zh)
0825Armenian (hy)1620Portuguese (pt)2621Zulu (zu)
0901Interlingua (ia)1721Quechua (qu)

Country/Area Code

For details, see page 145.

Number Area (Code) Number Area (Code)
0118Argentina (ar)1325Malaysia (my)
0121Australia (au)1324Mexico (mx)
0120Austria (at)1412Netherlands (nl)
0205Belgium (be)1426New Zealand (nz)
0218Brazil (br)1415Norway (no)
0301Canada (ca)1611Pakistan (pk)
0312Chile (cl)1608Philippines (ph)
0314China (cn)1620Portugal (pt)
0411Denmark (dk)1821Russia (ru)
0609Finland (fi)1907Singapore (sg)
0618France (fr)0519Spain (es)
0405Germany (de)1905Sweden (se)
0811Hong Kong (hk)0308Switzerland (ch)
0914India (in)2023Taiwan (tw)
0904Indonesia (id)2008Thailand (th)
0920Italy (it)0702United Kingdom (gb)
1016Japan (jp)2119USA (us)
1118Korea (kr)

Index

Words in quotations appear in the on-screen displays.

Numerics

“16:9” 144

"4:3 Letter Box" 144

"4:3 Pan Scan" 144

“96 kHz PCM Output” 139

A

"A-B Erase" 93

"A-B Repeat" 84, 109

"Add New Channels" 131

Adjusting

playback picture 85

recording picture 59, 76

Aerial 15

"AFT" 134

Album List 114

"Genre" 114

"Set Skip" 115

"Sort Titles" 114

"Album Name" 117

"Album Search" 111

"Alternate Search" 58

"Analog Tuner" 133

"Analog Tuner Level" 137

ANGLE 80, 125

"Angle Indicator" 80, 145

AUDIO 82, 108

Audio cord 22

"Audio DRC" 139

"Audio In" 137

Audio input 23

"Audio Language" 140

"Audio Out" 138

"Auto" 129

"Auto Channel Setting" 133

"Auto Chapter (DVD+R/

+RW)" 143

"Auto Chapter (HDD/

VR)" 143

"Auto Chapter (Video)" 143

Auto Clock Set 27, 129

"Auto Language" 140

"Auto Scan" 133

"Auto Skip" 132

B

“Basic” 128, 129

Batteries 24

"Bilingual Recording" 138

Bilingual recording 72

'BRAVIA' Theatre Sync 21

C

Canal Plus 33

CD 12

"CH System" 134

"Change Genre" 93

"Change Password" 145

"Channel" 134

"Channel Options" 132

"Channel Sort" 131

"Channel Swapping" 135

Chapter 41, 59, 77

Chapter number 41

"Chapter Search" 89

Chase Play 88

Checking/changing/

cancelling timer settings 60, 77

Child Lock 81, 108

"Clock Setting" 27, 129

"Combine" 96, 97

"Command Mode" 25, 149

COMPONENT VIDEO

OUT 20

"Component Video Out" 136

"Confirm Printer" 150

Connecting

a printer 126

the aerial cable 15

the audio cords 22

the HDMI cord 19, 22

the set top box controller 15

the USB device 112, 118

the video cords 19

Controlling TVs with the remote 24

"Copy" 119

"Copy Album" 113

"Copy Album Contents" 119

Copy control signals 53, 72

"Copy to DVD" 120

Copy-Free 53, 72

Copying

audio tracks 112

JPEG image files 118, 119, 120

Copy-Never 53, 72

Copy-Once 53, 72

Country/Area code 168

CPRM 11

Creating a Playlist 96

D

“D.TV Age Limit” 146

“D.TV Language” 132

DATA CD 12

DATA DVD 12

"Decoder" 34, 134

DIGITAL OUT

(COAXIAL) 22

Digital Services

Digital Text viewing 50

EPG 48

Programme information 49

"Digital Tuner" 131

Disc settings 43, 45, 47, 128

“Disc Setup” 43, 45, 47, 128

Disc space 92

Disc types 10, 91

“Divide” 94, 95, 97

DivX video files 80

Dolby Digital 22, 138

"Download from TV" 133

DTS 22, 139

Dubbing

Dubbing List 100

HDD/DVD DUB 99

DV camcorder 104

DV camcorder dubbing 104

"Manual Dubbing" 106

"One-Touch Dubbing" 106

"Playback" 107

DV IN 104

“DV Input” 105, 138

“DVD Backup” 103

“DVD Menu Language” 140

“DVD Playback” 146

DVD VIDEO 12

DVD+R 10, 91

DVD+RW 10, 91

DVD-R 10, 91

DVD-RAM 12

DVD-RW 10, 91

E

Easy Setup 26, 130

"Edit" 92, 117

Editing 91, 96

chapters 95

Playlist 96

titles 92

"Editor" 64

Enter characters 42

EPG

Viewing a list of available channels 48

“EPG Link” 58

“EPG Type Select” 130

“Erase” 60, 92, 93, 117, 126

"Erase Album" 125

"External Audio" 138

F

"Finalise" 45

Finalising 45

"Format" 47

"Format DVD-RW" 128

"Format HDD." 128

Formatting 47

“Frame Accurate Editing” 92

Freeze Frame 83

Front panel 165

"Front Panel Display" 149

Front panel display 166

G

"Genre Name" 93, 117

"Grid" 63

GUIDE 63

GUIDE Plus+ system 63, 73

H

Handling discs 159

"HDD Recording Format" 144

HDMI

“4:3 Video Output” 147

"Audio Output" 148

"Colour" 148

"HDMI Control" 148

"Screen Resolution" 147

HDMI cord 19, 22

HDMI OUT 20, 22

"HDMI Output" 147

"HELP Setting" 130

|

i.LINK 163

"Info" 64

INPUT 61, 79

"Input Colour System" 136

"Input Line System" 130

J

JPEG image files 118

Jukebox 112

L

Labelling 43

"Language" 140

"LINE 1 In" 137

LINE 1/DECODER 31

LINE 2 IN 32

"LINE 3 Out" 136

M

Main sound 72, 138

Mains lead 23

Making a backup disc 103

Managing

audio tracks on the Music Jukebox 117

JPEG image files 125

"Manual" 129

"Manual CH Setting" 133

Manual Clock Set 27, 129

"Manual Dubbing" 106

"Manual Rec. Mode" 141

Manual recording mode 141

MENU 80

Menu

DVD's Menu 80

Top menu 80

“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” 138

“Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)” 138

“Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)” 138

"Modify" 60

"Move" 97

MP3 audio tracks 108

MPEG 22, 139

"Multi-Mode" 93

"Music Jukebox" 112

"My TV" 63

N

“Name” 134

"New Album" 125

NICAM 72, 137

“NICAM Select” 137

“NTSC on PAL TV” 137

Number buttons 43

0

"On Screen Display" 149

ONE-TOUCH DUB 106

One-Touch Dubbing 106

One-Touch Play 21, 81

"Optimise HDD" 128

"Options" 149

Original 39, 91

"OSD Language" 140

P

Page mode 39, 114, 123

Parental Lock 81, 145

Parts and controls 164

Pause Live TV 87

"Pause Mode" 145

PAY-TV 33

PBC 80

PDC 54, 78

"Photo Album" 118

"Photo Album" list 122

“Picture Adjustment” 76, 85

Picture quality 59, 76, 85

PLAY MODE 84, 85,

109, 110, 115, 116

"Play Mode" 117

Play mode

“A-B Repeat” 84, 109

“Programme” 85, 110, 116

"Repeat" 84, 109, 115

Playable discs 10, 12

"Playback" 107, 144

Playback 10, 80, 108, 114, 122

“A-B Repeat” 84, 109

DivX video files 80

DV camcorder 107

fast forward 82, 108, 115

fast reverse 82, 108, 115

freeze frame 83

instant advance 82

instant replay 82

JPEG image files 122

Jukebox 114

MP3 audio tracks 108

“Programme” 85, 110, 116

"Repeat" 84, 109, 115

resume play 81

rotate 125

scan audio 80

slow-motion play 83

zoom 124

Playlist 39, 91

"Power Save" 130

Printing JPEG image files 126

"Programme" 85, 110, 116

Programme information 49

"Progressive" 28

"Protect" 93, 126

"Protect Album Contents" 126

"Protect Disc" 44

Protection

album 126

disc 44

JPEG image file 126

title 93

Q

Quick guide to disc types 10

Quick Timer 58, 75

R

Rear panel 166

REC 36

REC MODE 71

REC STOP 36, 106

“Rec. Mode Adjust” 55, 74, 75, 143

"Recommendation

Search" 58

Recordable discs 10

"Recording" 141

Recording 52, 71

picture adjustment 59, 76

recording format 10

recording mode 37, 52, 71

recording time 37, 52, 71

Series Recording 57

while watching another programme 37

Recording mode 37, 52, 71

Recording time 37, 52, 71

Recovery Recording 54, 78

Region code 13

"Registration Code" 150

Remaining time 41

Remote 24, 164

"Rename Album" 126

"Rename File" 126

"Repeat" 84, 109, 115

"Repeat Album" 109, 115

"Repeat Chapter" 84

"Repeat Disc" 84, 109

“Repeat Programme” 84, 109, 115

"Repeat Title" 84

“Repeat Track” 84, 109, 115

"Replace Channels" 131

Resetting the recorder 130, 158

"Restart USB Device" 150

Resume Play 81

"RGB" 136, 137

Rotate 125

S

S VIDEO 20

Scan Audio 80

"Schedule" 63

"Seamless Playback" 145

"Search" 63

Searching

audio track 108, 115

by genre 39, 114

fast reverse/fast forward 82, 108, 115

JPEG image file 124

locating the beginning of the title/chapter/track 82, 108, 115

scan audio 80

"Series Recording" 57

"Series Search" 58

"Set Genre" 93, 117

"Set Password" 145

"Set Preview" 150

"Set Skip" 115, 117

"Set Thumbnail" 92, 143

Set top box controller 15, 29

Set top box receiver 17

Setting up the GUIDE

Plus+ system 28

"Setup" 64

"Signal Check" 132

Simultaneous Rec and Play 88

"Skip" 134

"Skip Once" 60

Slideshow 124

Slow-motion play 83

SMARTLINK 21, 150

"Software Update" 150

"Sort Titles" 39, 114

"Sound System" 134

Split Programmes 58

"Standard (4:3)" 28

"Stereo 1" 138

“Stereo 2” 138

Sub sound 72, 138

SUBTITLE 82

"Subtitle Display" 140

"Subtitle Language" 140

"Subtitle Recording" 143

Super VIDEO CD 12

“S-Video” 136, 137

T

Thumbnail picture 39 preview mode 40, 150

"Time Search" 89

TIMER 54

Timer List 60

Timer recording

check/change/cancel 60, 77

EPG timer setting 55

GUIDE Plus+ system 73

manual setting 53, 74

"Rec. Mode Adjust" 55, 74, 75

"Timing" 78

Title 41

Title List 38

"Genre" 39

"Sort Titles" 39

Thumbnail 39

"Title Name" 92

Title number 41

"Title Search" 89

TOP MENU 80

"Track Name"117

"Track Search" 89, 111

Troubleshooting 151

"TV Direct Rec." 21, 37

"TV Pause" 150

TV Pause 87

"TV Screen Size" 28

TV system 134

TV 24,37

"TV Type" 144

TV/DVD 25, 37

U

"Undo" 93

"Unfinalise" 46

Unfinalising 46

"Unprotected" 93

Usable discs 10, 12

V

"Video" 136, 137

VIDEO CD 12

Video cord 19

"Video In/Out" 136

Video input 20

Video mode 10

"Video Mode Compatible

Editing" 92

VPS 54, 78

VR mode 10

W

"Wide (16:9)" 28

Z

Zoom 124

ZWEITON 72

SONY RDR-HXD770 - Z - 1

Printed on 70% or more recycled paper.

*I-311376012Z*

3-113-760-12(1)

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : SONY

Model : RDR-HXD770

Category : DVD Recorder